Ford 2016 Police Interceptor Utility Owners Manual
2015-10-23
: Ford Ford-2016-Ford-Police-Interceptor-Utility-Owners-Manual-815571 ford-2016-ford-police-interceptor-utility-owners-manual-815571 ford pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 350
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2016 POLICE INTERCEPTOR - UTILITY Owner’s Manual ford.ca April 2015 First Printing Owner’s Manual Police Interceptor - Utility Litho in U.S.A. GL2J 19A321 FA 2016 POLICE INTERCEPTOR - UTILITY Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2015 All rights reserved. Part Number: 03/2015 20150327134140 Table of Contents Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35 Front Passenger Sensing System............36 Side Airbags.....................................................38 Passenger Knee Airbag................................39 Safety Canopy™............................................39 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40 Airbag Disposal...............................................45 Introduction About This Manual...........................................5 Symbols Glossary.............................................5 Data Recording..................................................7 California Proposition 65...............................9 Perchlorate..........................................................9 Ford Credit...........................................................9 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................9 Special Notices................................................10 Mobile Communications Equipment......................................................11 Export Unique Options...................................11 Keys and Remote Controls Principle of Operation..................................46 General Information on Radio Frequencies.................................................46 Remote Control..............................................46 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control............................................................47 Environment Protecting the Environment........................12 Locks Locking and Unlocking................................48 Manual Liftgate..............................................50 Child Safety General Information.......................................13 Installing Child Seats.....................................14 Booster Seats..................................................20 Child Seat Positioning...................................22 Child Safety Locks.........................................24 Security Anti-Theft Alarm............................................52 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53 Audio Control...................................................53 Cruise Control..................................................54 Information Display Control.......................54 Safety Belts Principle of Operation..................................26 Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27 Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29 Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime.............................................................30 Safety Belt Minder.........................................30 Child Restraint and Safety Belt Maintenance................................................32 Pedals Adjusting the Pedals.....................................55 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers........................................56 Windshield Washers.....................................56 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........56 Personal Safety System™ Personal Safety System™..........................33 Supplementary Restraints System Lighting General Information.....................................58 Lighting Control..............................................58 Principle of Operation..................................34 1 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Table of Contents Autolamps........................................................59 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................60 Daytime Running Lamps............................60 Direction Indicators........................................61 Interior Lamps..................................................61 Storage Compartments Center Console...............................................96 Overhead Console.........................................96 Starting and Stopping the Engine Windows and Mirrors General Information......................................97 Ignition Switch.................................................97 Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................97 Engine Block Heater.....................................99 Power Windows..............................................63 Exterior Mirrors................................................64 Interior Mirror...................................................65 Sun Visors.........................................................66 Fuel and Refueling Instrument Cluster General Information......................................73 Information Messages..................................76 Safety Precautions.......................................101 Fuel Quality....................................................102 Fuel Quality - E85........................................102 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................103 Running Out of Fuel....................................103 Refueling.........................................................104 Fuel Consumption.......................................106 Emission Control System..........................107 Climate Control Transmission Manual Climate Control..............................86 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate...........................................................87 Heated Windows and Mirrors...................88 Cabin Air Filter.................................................89 Automatic Transmission............................110 Gauges................................................................67 Warning Lamps and Indicators................68 Audible Warnings and Indicators...............71 Information Displays All-Wheel Drive Using All-Wheel Drive..................................112 Brakes Seats General Information.....................................119 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................119 Parking Brake.................................................120 Sitting in the Correct Position...................90 Head Restraints..............................................90 Manual Seats...................................................92 Power Seats.....................................................93 Rear Seats.........................................................93 Traction Control Principle of Operation..................................121 Using Traction Control.................................121 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Points.................................95 Stability Control Principle of Operation.................................122 2 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Table of Contents Using Stability Control................................123 Fuel Shutoff....................................................157 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................158 Post-Crash Alert System...........................160 Parking Aids Principle of Operation.................................124 Rear Parking Aid............................................124 Rear View Camera........................................125 Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need.................161 In California (U.S. Only).............................162 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)......................163 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only)........................163 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada.........................................................164 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature.....................................................165 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).............................................................165 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only).............................................................166 Cruise Control Principle of Operation.................................129 Using Cruise Control....................................129 Driving Aids Blind Spot Information System................131 Cross Traffic Alert.........................................133 Steering............................................................136 Load Carrying Rear Loadspace Hatches...........................137 Rear Under Floor Storage..........................137 Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................137 Load Limit.......................................................138 Fuses Fuse Specification Chart............................167 Changing a Fuse............................................175 Towing Maintenance Towing a Trailer.............................................146 Recommended Towing Weights.............147 Essential Towing Checks...........................148 Transporting the Vehicle...........................150 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Ecoboost™/3.7L..............................151 General Information....................................176 Opening and Closing the Hood................177 Under Hood Overview.................................179 Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................180 Engine Oil Check..........................................180 Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................180 Engine Coolant Check.................................181 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Ecoboost™.......................................185 Brake Fluid Check........................................186 Power Steering Fluid Check......................187 Washer Fluid Check.....................................187 Fuel Filter.........................................................187 Changing the 12V Battery..........................187 Checking the Wiper Blades......................189 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................189 Driving Hints Breaking-In......................................................153 Economical Driving......................................153 Driving Through Water................................154 Floor Mats.......................................................154 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance...................................156 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................157 3 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Table of Contents Adjusting the Headlamps.........................190 Removing a Headlamp...............................192 Changing a Bulb............................................192 Bulb Specification Chart...........................195 Changing the Engine Air Filter..................197 Transmission Code Designation.............237 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™................................................238 Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.....242 Vehicle Care General Information....................................247 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC............................................................248 Digital Radio..................................................250 Satellite Radio..............................................253 USB Port.........................................................255 Audio System General Information....................................198 Cleaning Products.......................................198 Cleaning the Exterior...................................198 Waxing..............................................................199 Cleaning the Engine....................................199 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades.........................................................200 Cleaning the Interior..................................200 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens........................201 Cleaning Leather Seats..............................201 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............202 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................202 Vehicle Storage............................................202 SYNC™ General Information...................................256 Using Voice Recognition...........................258 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........260 SYNC™ Applications and Services.......272 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player............................................................277 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................286 Extended Service Plan (ESP) Wheels and Tires General Information...................................205 Tire Care..........................................................207 Using Summer Tires....................................221 Using Snow Chains.....................................222 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........223 Changing a Road Wheel............................227 Technical Specifications............................231 Extended Service Plan (ESP).................294 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information.......296 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........299 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance.............................................302 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........305 Capacities and Specifications Appendices Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™................................................233 Engine Specifications - 3.7L.....................233 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......234 Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...............................235 Vehicle Identification Number................236 Vehicle Certification Label........................237 End User License Agreement..................316 4 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Safety alert Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. See Owner's Manual Air conditioning system Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so they may appear different to you on your vehicle. E162384 Anti-lock braking system Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. Battery Battery acid This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum based 5 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction Brake system Front airbag Cabin air filter Front fog lamps Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window Cruise control Heated windshield Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment release Engine air filter Jack Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children E71340 E161353 Engine coolant temperature Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level Fan warning Note operating instructions Fasten safety belt Panic alarm 6 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 256). Parking aid E139213 Parking brake Power steering fluid Power windows front/rear Power window lockout Service engine soon Event Data Recording Side airbag This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control E138639 Windshield wash and wipe The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair 7 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 256). Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ (page 256). 8 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. PERCHLORATE Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. FORD CREDIT (U.S. Only) Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as to help manage your account. Phone: 1-800-727-7000 For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as to access Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com. 9 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may not cover damage caused by any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in device. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. WARNINGS You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package. Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag. Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II) system has a data port for diagnostics, repair and reprogramming services with diagnostic scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example 10 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Introduction My Fleet Management (if equipped) communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. This feature allows a fleet administrator to control specific vehicle settings using a Ford authorized service tool. This helps the fleet administrator set certain vehicle settings to match administrative policy. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The configurable settings are: • Vehicle Speed: Select an alternative speed limit that is below your vehicle's maximum capability. A message displays and a tone sounds when starting your vehicle to indicate the customized speed limit. • Audio Volume: Select a limit for the maximum volume of the audio system in the range of 0% (full mute) to 100% (no limit) in 10% increments. For more information regarding the My Fleet Management feature configuration process, reference the procedure in the "Police Upfit & Modifier’s Guide" found at: EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. Web Address www.fordpoliceinterceptorupfit.com MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile 11 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. 12 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, locate your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNINGS Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. All children are shaped differently. The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height, age and weight thresholds from National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child, and Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 13 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint type Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 36). INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Child Seats E142594 14 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seat back upright. Child Safety • Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). • Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Note: Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the Lock-off device. In some instances these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with safety belt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. • Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position. E142528 1. 15 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing For second-row seating positions, adjust the recliner slightly to improve child seat fit. If needed, remove the head restraints. Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Child Safety E142529 E142531 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142875 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 16 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. E142533 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral to a Certified Passenger Seat Technician. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) WARNINGS Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 17 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation. Child Safety Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. WARNINGS Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors located where the seatback and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position. E144054 The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback below the symbols as shown. Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat, however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat. Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. E142535 18 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle. The lower anchors at the center of the second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in (52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm) center to center. A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor. Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Second row seats Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. E142537 Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Using Tether Straps Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. 19 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Placement of the tether strap E190831 If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seatback. If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. E190833 2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. The tether hook may be twisted ½ turn to improve installation. If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash. 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if 20 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Types of Booster Seats recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: E68924 • E142595 • • • • • Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. E70710 • High back booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. 21 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E142596 E142597 If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all 22 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety WARNINGS the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat. WARNINGS Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash. Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. 23 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Child Safety Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Restraint Type Combined weight of child and child seat LATCH (lower anchors and top tether anchor) LATCH (lower anchors only) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt and LATCH only and top (lower tether anchors anchor and top tether anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 90). CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. E112197 24 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing X X X X Child Safety The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 25 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. The safety belt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder safety belts. • Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode (except driver safety belt). • Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions. • Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. • Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 26 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing • Safety belt warning light and chime. • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS E142588 The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the following figure. E142587 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. E142590 27 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNINGS After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for proper function. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner. Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 13). All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode. The front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows: 28 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is on a label located either at the end of the webbing or on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING E142591 Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. E201573 Safety Belt Extension Assembly To adjust the shoulder belt height: 1. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. 2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt. Press the button and slide it down to lower the belt. WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer. 29 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The safety belt warning light illuminates 12 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator the ignition switch is turned to the on posichime remain off. tion... The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place on the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system. SAFETY BELT MINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a safety belt is unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on. 30 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts If... Then... You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. your safety belts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts. The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled. Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to switch this feature off, the intent of the system is to remind you to wear your safety belt to improve your chance to survive an accident. We recommend you leave the system switched on for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle. 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 60 seconds. 3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt four times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the safety belt warning light turns on. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process. Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. 31 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Safety Belts 4. While the safety belt warning light is on, buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. • This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle Care (page 198). 32 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Personal Safety System™ How Does the Personal Safety System Work? The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Your vehicle's Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. • Front seat outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors (first row only) and safety belt usage sensors. • Driver seat position sensor. • Front passenger sensing system. • Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. • Front crash severity sensors. • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. • Restraint system warning light and backup tone. • The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. 33 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. 34 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING WARNINGS Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. Children and Airbags WARNING The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. • Front passenger sensing system. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 40). 35 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. E181984 The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator that will illuminate indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled). FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel. Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional. WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger's frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty. Sitting improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor. Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. 36 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the airbag OFF indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag. • If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger's frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat. Occupant Passenger airbag status indicator Passenger airbag Empty OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit Child OFF: Lit Adult OFF: Unlit Disabled ON: Unlit Enabled ON: Lit Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF light is illuminated, the passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their 37 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. WARNINGS Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 40). Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer. The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. See Getting the Services You Need (page 161). SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks. • Front passenger sensing system. Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. 38 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System SAFETY CANOPY™ • WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 40). Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAG The knee airbag is located under the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the passenger knee airbag based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the passenger knee airbag may deploy but the passenger front airbag may not activate. To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the A, B, C and D pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. 39 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. E75004 The system consists of the following: • Safety canopy curtain airbags located above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints control module deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash (frontal impact or side impact), the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 40). 40 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes and in rollovers. • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. • The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions. • The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: • • • The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. Airbags and Police Equipment WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment in front of the airbag module cover or in front of the seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 41 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System All airbag and equipment mounting zone dimensions are approximate due to different airbag deployment characteristics. WARNINGS Dash, tunnel or console-mounted equipment should not be placed outside of the specified zone. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. No equipment will mount between the side of the front seat and the door trim to block deployment of the side airbag. Do not mount equipment between the side of front seat to the door trim to block deployment of the side airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Figure 1 Dual driver and passenger airbags, side airbags and knee airbags affect the way police equipment can be mounted in police vehicles. Any surfaces that could come into contact with an airbag, once it has deployed, must not damage the airbag or alter its deployment path. E201575 Once the airbag has fully deployed, any peripheral equipment surfaces that could come into contact with the airbag (such as when the airbag deflates with the loading of an occupant) must not damage the airbag or alter its deployment path. Sharp edges, corners or protrusions could damage the nylon airbag material and reduce the effectiveness of the airbag. 1. 9.5 inches (240 millimeters) from center of emblem. 2. 13.8 inches (350 millimeters) from center of airbag door. 3. 28.3 inches (720 millimeters). Note: No objects should be placed between the airbags due to airbag variability. Figure 2 Some approximate dimensions for airbags, at full inflation, are provided in Figures 1 through 5. These dimensions are somewhat flexible and represent free form deployments without the loading of occupants. The shaded areas in Figures 6 through 8 represent available police equipment mounting zones. These zones are shown for police vehicles equipped with standard bucket seats. The zone dimensions provided in Figures 6 through 8 are approximate and will vary with the loading of occupants in the seats. E201576 1. 42 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing 27.5 inches (700 millimeters). Supplementary Restraints System Figure 3 WARNING The partition and the installation hardware of the partition must not interfere with the operation and deployment of the rollover curtain air bags and seat side air bags. Failure to follow these instructions may cause personal injury. Figure 5 (If equipped) E201577 1. Front passenger airbag - 22.8 inches (580 millimeters). 2. Front driver airbag – 17 inches (430 millimeters). Note: No objects should be placed between the driver side steering wheel airbag and the passenger side dash airbag. Figure 4 (If equipped) E201579 3. E201578 1. From outboard side of seat - 8 inches (200 millimeters). 2. Forward of seatback - 15 inches (380 millimeters). 43 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Up from side airbag module 27.5 inches (700 millimeters). Supplementary Restraints System Figure 6 E201581 1. Area on top of the instrument panel (Note: Equipment must not interfere with driver visibility). 2. Airbag door must be kept clear for deployment of the airbag. 3. Area in front of the center console from the bottom to the top of the instrument panel. 4. Area in front of electronic finish panel from the bottom to the top of the instrument panel. Figure 7 E206315 1. Area on top of instrument panel. 2. Area in front of center console from tunnel up to instrument panel. 3. Prisoner screen (reference only). 44 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Supplementary Restraints System 4. 10 inches (254 millimeters). 5. Area on tunnel between seats. 6. Height: 8.5 inches (216 millimeters). 7. 12 inches (305 millimeters). 8. Area on tunnel beneath center console. 9. Tunnel. 10. Depth: 1.5 inches (38 millimeters). Figure 8 E201583 1. Area on top of the instrument panel. Note: Equipment must not interfere with driver visibility. 2. Area on tunnel between seats. 3. 9 inches (229 millimeters). AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 45 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls • • PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The remote control allows you to: • Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors. • Unlock the doors without actively using a key or remote control (intelligent access only). • Remotely open the power liftgate (if equipped). • Remotely start or stop the engine and user pre-set features (if equipped). • Arm and disarm the anti-theft system. • Activate the panic alarm. structures around the vehicle other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES Note: The remote control contains sensitive electrical components. Exposure to moisture or impact may cause permanent damage. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. REMOTE CONTROL (If Equipped) Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • weather conditions • nearby radio towers E203600 46 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Keys and Remote Controls 2. Remove the old battery. 3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the symbols inside the transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing. 4. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally. Note: If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take all remote entry transmitters with you to an authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem. Changing the Remote Control Battery The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an E107998 environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn sounds E138623 and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. 2 Note: This feature does not work for vehicles with the Dark Car feature. Sounding the Panic Alarm E138624 Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to turn it off. Note: The panic alarm operates regardless of the ignition position. E203601 REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL 1 Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. 1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the transmitter near the key ring to remove the battery cover. Note: Do not remove the rubber cover and circuit board from the front housing of the remote control. To re-program the passive anti-theft system see an authorized dealer. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. 47 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle. Power Door Locks (If Equipped) The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. A B E184784 A Unlock. B Lock. E203323 Open the front doors to access the lock knob. Pull the knob to unlock and push the knob to lock. Hidden Rear Door Locks (If Equipped) You can manually lock or unlock the rear doors using the hidden lock knob on the inside front edge of the rear doors. Remote Control You can use the remote control at any time. Note: For vehicles with the Dark Car feature, the direction indicators do not flash and the horn does not sound when you lock or unlock your vehicle. Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock) Press the button to unlock the driver door. E138629 48 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Locks Liftgate Timed Release Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. Switch the ignition to the run, start or accessory position. Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for three seconds to change between driver door or all doors unlock mode. The direction indicators will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the driver door when you press the unlock button once. All door mode unlocks all doors when you press the unlock button once. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control. Pull and release the liftgate control on the overhead console. Note: Only the liftgate unlocks. All other passenger doors remain in the previous locking state. A warning lamp illuminates in the instrument cluster for 45 seconds. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 68). You can then open the liftgate using the exterior liftgate release button. Locking the Doors E138623 Once the 45 second timer expires, the lamp turns off and you can no longer open the liftgate. Pull and release the liftgate control on the overhead console again to restart the timer. Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will flash if all the doors and the liftgate are closed. Note: You can also unlock the liftgate by using the key blade inserted into the liftgate lock cylinder. Locking The liftgate locks when any of the following occur: • You open and close the liftgate after you pull and release the liftgate control on the overhead console. • The 45 second timer expires. Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will sound twice and the direction indicators will not flash. Independent Liftgate Locking Feature Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade This feature allows you to unlock the liftgate independently of the other doors. Locking with the Key Unlocking Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle. The liftgate unlocks when you pull and release the liftgate control on the overhead console with the ignition on. Unlocking with the Key Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle. Note: The liftgate does not unlock when you unlock all the doors electronically using the remote control or power door lock control. 49 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Locks Note: If the child safety locks are on and you pull the interior handle, you will only turn off the emergency locking, not the child safety lock. You can only open the doors using the external door handle. MANUAL LIFTGATE WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Opening a Rear Door From the Inside Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull opens the door. Illuminated Entry (If Equipped) Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote control. The lamps turn off if: • The ignition is on. • You press the remote control lock button. • 25 seconds have elapsed. The lamps do not turn off if: • You switch them on with the lighting control. • Any door is open. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Illuminated Exit (If Equipped) The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and: • 25 seconds have elapsed. • You lock your vehicle from the outside. Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off. 50 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Locks Opening the Liftgate E138632 Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, and then pull on the outside handle. Closing the Liftgate E155976 A handle is inside the liftgate to help with closing. 51 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Security ANTI-THEFT ALARM Alarm System The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors, luggage compartment and the hood. Triggering the Alarm Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways: • • If someone opens a door, cargo area or the hood without a valid key or remote control. If you switch the ignition on without a valid key. If the alarm is triggered, the horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes. Any further attempts to perform one of the above will trigger the alarm again. Arming the Alarm To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See Locks (page 48). Disarming the Alarm Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on within 12 seconds, or by unlocking the doors or the cargo area with the remote control. 52 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Steering Wheel AUDIO CONTROL ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL You can operate the following functions with the control: WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 90). E209105 E191039 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. A Seek down or previous. B Media. C Volume up or down. D Mute. E Seek up or next. Seek and Media Press the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • Seek through a track. Press the media button repeatedly to: • Scroll through available audio modes. E191047 3. Lock the steering column. 53 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Steering Wheel Information Display Control Features CRUISE CONTROL E200995 E201376 See Using Cruise Control (page 129). This control functions the same as the center control on the faceplate. See Audio System (page 247). INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL Use this control to adjust the right side of the information display. Navigate through the screen and press OK to select. E201376 See Information Displays (page 73). 54 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Pedals ADJUSTING THE PEDALS WARNING Never use the controls while your feet are on the accelerator and brake pedals and the vehicle is moving. You can find the control on the left side of the steering column. Press and hold the appropriate side of the control to move the pedals. A B E162916 A. Farther. B. Closer. Note: Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in park (P). 55 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 189). Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. E208497 Press the end of the wiper lever to activate the washer: • A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid. • A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe the windshield three times with washer fluid. • A long press and hold activates the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds. E208496 Rotate the end of the control: • Away from you to increase the wiper speed. • Toward you to decrease the wiper speed. A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can switch this feature on and off through the information display. See General Information (page 73). Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rear Window Wiper Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper system before using an automatic car wash. 56 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wipers and Washers E208498 Rotate the control to select: 2 Intermittent operation - the shortest pause between wipes. 1 Intermittent operation - the longest pause between wipes. 0 Off. Rear Window Washer E208498 Rotate and hold the control to the top or bottom position to activate the rear washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0 position when you release it. Rear Camera Washer Operating the rear washer also operates the rear camera washer. 57 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. A Off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and rear lamps. C Headlamps. High Beams Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E167827 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 58 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Lighting Headlamp Flasher AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) WARNING The autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a collision. E163268 Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. Spot Lamp Control (If Equipped) E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations or when the wipers activate. If equipped, the following also activate when the lighting control is in the autolamps position and you switch them on in the information display: • Configurable daytime running lamps. • Automatic high beam control. • Adaptive headlamp control. E203952 Use the switch on the chrome handle to turn the spot lamp on and off. Rotate and twist the handle to adjust the position of the spot lamp. The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. See Information Displays (page 73). 59 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Lighting Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the high beam headlamps on until the autolamps system turns the low beam headlamps on. Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control is in the autolamps position. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation: • During a mist wipe. • When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. E161902 Repeatedly press or press and hold it to adjust the level. If equipped with the Dark Car feature, you can turn off the instrument cluster and information display lighting. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS WARNING The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Also, the autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure the headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note: You disable the manual dimmer when you adjust the setting to Auto Dimming in the information display. See Information Displays (page 73). Note: If you disconnect the battery or it runs out of charge, the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting. The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The ignition is switched to the on position. 2. The lighting control is in the off position, parking lamps position or the autolamps position, and the sensor detects daylight. 60 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Lighting Front Map Lamps (If Equipped) DIRECTION INDICATORS E163273 E163272 • • The lamps will switch on when: To operate the left direction indicator, push the lever down until it stops. To operate the right direction indicator, push the lever up until it stops. • • • Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times. You open any door. You press the dome lamp button on the instrument panel. You press a remote control button and the ignition is off. INTERIOR LAMPS To manually switch on the map lamps, press the outer edge of the clear lens. Dome Lamp Note: If equipped with Dark Car feature, the courtesy lamps will not turn on. Dome Task Lamp (If Equipped) E203953 E206739 Press the button to switch the interior lamps on or off. 61 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing A Night vision red light on. B Off position. C White light on. Lighting Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two red or white dome task lamps located in the headliner. These lamps may be located between the driver and passenger seat, or at the rear of your vehicle. Note: Prolonged use of the dome task lamps will cause the battery to run out of charge. Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped) A E142455 You can switch individual map lamps on independently by pressing switch A. 62 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Windows and Mirrors Bounce-Back POWER WINDOWS The window will stop automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Pull up the window switch and hold within a few seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window travels up with no bounce-back protection. The window stops if you release the switch before the window closes fully. Window Lock E146043 Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Lift the switch to close the window. One-Touch Down E144072 Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window. Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It will illuminate when you lock the rear window controls. One-Touch Up Accessory Delay Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. 63 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Windows and Mirrors EXTERIOR MIRRORS Heated Exterior Mirrors Power Exterior Mirrors See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 88). WARNING (If Equipped) Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. Equipped) WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear. Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle. Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change lanes. E144073 A Left-hand mirror. B Adjustment control. C Right-hand mirror. To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control lights. 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. 64 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Windows and Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving. Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. C You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. B Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor. A E138665 The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance. The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions from the main mirror and begins to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) See Blind Spot Information System (page 131). 65 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Windows and Mirrors SUN VISORS Slide-on-rod (If Equipped) E138666 Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. 66 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES E194299 A Tachometer. B Information display. See Information Displays (page 73). C Speedometer. D Fuel gauge. E Engine coolant temperature gauge. Information Display Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information (page 73). 67 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Instrument Cluster Speedometer Low Fuel Reminder Your vehicle is shipped with a certified digital speedometer and analog gauge. If your local procedures require calibration, utilize the distance per time on-road test or a radar-based speed test. If a dynamometer calibration is required, reference the calibration procedure found at www.Fleet.Ford.com or check OASIS for updated information. A low fuel reminder triggers when the distance to empty reaches, 75 mi (120 km), 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 12 mi (20 km), 0 mi (0 km). Variations: Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. Fuel Gauge Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs service soon. WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. After refueling some variability in needle position is normal: • • • • WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS It may take a short time for the needle to reach full after leaving the gas station. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different gas pump nozzle. There is a small reserve left in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches empty. The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp, but do not display when you start your vehicle. 68 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Instrument Cluster Anti-Lock Braking System WARNING Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Battery If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Cruise Control (If Equipped) Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) Direction Indicator It illuminates when you switch this feature on. E71340 Illuminates when you switch on the left or right direction indicator or the hazard warning flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 192). It illuminates when you switch this feature off or in conjunction E151262 with a message. See Blind Spot Information System (page 131). Brake System E144522 Door Ajar It illuminates when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on. Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed. If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked immediately by an authorized dealer. Engine Coolant Temperature Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181). 69 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Instrument Cluster Liftgate Lock Release Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). E206359 Low Fuel Level It illuminates when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. possible. Low Tire Pressure Warning Fasten Safety Belt It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. It illuminates and a chime sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belt. See Safety Belt Minder (page 30). It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Front Airbag If it fails to illuminate when you start your vehicle, continues to flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Low Washer Fluid High Beam It illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low. It illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It flashes when you use the headlamp flasher. E132353 Parking Lamps It illuminates when you switch the parking lamps on. Hood Ajar (If Equipped) E159324 Displays when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed. Powertrain Fault Illuminates when the system detects a powertrain or a 4WD fault. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Liftgate Ajar Lights when the liftgate is not completely closed. E162453 70 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Lights when liftgate is currently unlocked due to actuation of liftgate. Instrument Cluster Service Engine Soon Stability Control If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated after you start the engine, it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control System (page 107). It flashes when the system is active. If it remains illuminated E138639 or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system switches off. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 123). If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately. It illuminates when you switch the system off. It goes out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Using Stability Control (page 123). Stability Control Off WARNING AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately. Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition. Headlamps On Warning Chime The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when you first switch on the ignition before engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Parking Brake On Warning Chime Normally, the service engine soon light stays on until you crank the engine, then turns itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See Emission Control System (page 107). Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. 71 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Instrument Cluster Automatic Transmission Warning Chime Sounds when you have not moved the transmission selector lever to position P. A message will be shown in the display. 72 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. You can control various systems on your vehicle using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information appears in the information display. E194300 • • • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a submenu. Press the left arrow button to exit a submenu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Trip 1 & 2 You can access the menu using the information display control. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. 73 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 Digital Speedometer Distance to E Trip Odometer Trip Timer Fuel Used Average Fuel All Values * Total Odometer (located in the lower right of the display) * This also displays in other menus. • • • • Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Distance to E — Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys. Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. • • • Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip. Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel. Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and fuel information. Fuel Economy Information Distance to Empty Instantaneous Fuel Economy Average MPG Fuel History All Values 74 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays • • • • • Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset. Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy since last reset. Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history. All Values — Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel). Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Driver Assist In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Driver Assist Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled Lane Keeping System Mode Alert, Aid or Alert +Aid Intensity High, Normal or Low Rear Park Aid - check enabled uncheck disabled Tire Pressure 4 Wheel Tire Pressure Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Settings Vehicle Alarm All Sensors Perimeter Sensing Ask on Exit Chimes Information - check enabled or uncheck disabled DTE Calcula- Normal or Towing tion Lighting Autolamp Delay 75 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Off or XX Seconds Information Displays Settings Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled Locks Remote unlock All Doors or Driver's Door Switches Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled Display Setup Oil Life Reset Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Wipers Courtesy Wipe or Rain Sensing Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/L Temperature Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C) Tire Pressure psi, kPa or bar Language Choose your applicable setting INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may display abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. E203207 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages delete automatically after a short time. You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus. 76 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays AWD Message Action AWD Temporarily Disabled The all wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating. AWD Off The all wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire. AWD Restored The all wheel drive system resumes normal function and clears this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools. AWD Malfunction Service Required The all wheel drive system is not operating properly and the powertrain fault indicator illuminates. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 68). If the warning stays illuminated or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service. AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube Set to New Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed and reset to new. AdvanceTrac™ Message Action Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. AdvanceTrac Off On The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control. Alarm Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle Unathorized entry triggered the alarm. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 52). 77 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off The battery management system detects an extended low voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage. Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features will operate as normal. Turn Power Off to Save Battery The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you start the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery state-of-charge recovery. Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer Sensor Blocked See as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System Manual (page 131). Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 131). Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 131). Cross Traffic System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 78 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Brake System Message Action Brake Fluid Level LOW The brake fluid level is low. Check the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 186). Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Engaged The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you release the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Doors and Locks Message Action Driver Door Ajar The driver door is not completely closed. Passenger Door Ajar The passenger door is not completely closed. Rear Left Door Ajar The rear left door is not completely closed. Rear Right Door Ajar The rear right door is not completely closed. Liftgate Ajar The liftgate is not completely closed. Hood Ajar The hood is not completely closed. Switches Inhibited Security Mode The system has disabled the door switches. Electronic Stability Control Message Action ESC Service required The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. ESC Off Displays the traction control system status. ESC On Displays the traction control system status. 79 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Engine Message Action High Engine Temperature Stop Safely Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181). Engine Fault Service Now Engine service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. Engine Oil Level Low Check Level Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). Fuel Message Action Fuel Level LOW An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle. No Key Detected The system does not detect the key. Restart Now or Key is Needed When you press the Start Stop button to shut off the engine, the system does not detect an Intelligent Access key inside your vehicle. Full Accessory Power Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state. Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system. Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system. 80 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Max Number of Keys Learned You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system. Not Enough Keys Learned You have not programmed enough keys to the system. Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible. Soon See Remote Control (page 46). Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle with the intelligent access key and the engine is on. Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that requires a clean windshield to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer tion Service Required as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel. Maintenance Message Action LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). Oil Change Required The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). 81 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Engine Coolant Overtemperature The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. Washer Fluid Level Low The washer fluid is low and needs refilling. Transport Mode Contact Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may Dealer not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer. Factory Mode Contact Dealer Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Aid Message Action Check Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 124). Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 124). Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Park Brake Message Action Park Brake Engaged You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer. 82 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Power Steering Message Action Steering Malfunction Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Service Power Steering Now The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle at a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system, or passive entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering column lock: You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the Remove and re-insert steering lock. key while turning wheel to unlock Seats Message Action Occupant Sensor Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objects BLOCKED Remove away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to Objects Near Passenger come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Seat Starting System Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle. Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle. Engine Start Pending Please Wait The starter is attempting to start your vehicle. Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start. 83 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action LOW Tire Pressure One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 223). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 223). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 223). Traction Control Message Action Traction Control Off Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 121). Traction Control On Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 121). Transmission Message Action Transmission Malfunction Service Now Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Overtemperature Stop Safely The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible. Transmission Overheating Stop Safely The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible. Transmission Service Required Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Too Hot Press Brake The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool. Transmission Limited Function See Manual The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page 110). 84 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Information Displays Message Action Transmission Warming Up Please Wait The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive. Transmission Not in Park A reminder to shift into park. Press Brake Pedal A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the transmission. Transmission Adjusted The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy. Transmission AdaptMode The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On The transmission is locked and unable to select gears. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears. 85 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) E208043 A Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. B Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. C Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor. Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates when the system is on. D A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off. E MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. F Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. 86 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Climate Control Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. G Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. H Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. Heating the Interior Quickly HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE • • General Hints Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting. Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting. Adjust the air distribution control to the footwell air vents position. Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. • Note: A small amount of air may be felt from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. Recommended Settings for Heating Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. • Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. • Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the windshield free from obstruction (such as snow or leaves) to allow the climate control system to function effectively. Cooling the Interior Quickly Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Increase the temperature and fan speed and press the A/C button to improve clearing, if required. • • • • 87 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the air distribution control to the footwell and windshield air vents position. Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting. Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A/C position. Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel air vents position. Climate Control Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions Recommended Settings for Cooling • • • Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel air vents position. • • • Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient Temperatures • • • • HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (If Equipped) Apply the parking brake. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or neutral. Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A/C position. Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed setting. Heated Rear Window Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows. Press the button to clear the heated rear window of thin ice E184884 and fog. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after a short period of time. Start the engine before you switch the heated rear window on. Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather • • • • • • Adjust the temperature control to the lowest setting. Press the A/C and recirculated air buttons. Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting initially and then adjust it to suit the desired comfort level. Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel and windshield air vents positions. Press the A/C button. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows. Close the instrument panel vents. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. Heated Exterior Mirror When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors will automatically turn on. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. 88 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Climate Control CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box. Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. 89 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash. Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. 90 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Seats Adjusting the Head Restraint WARNINGS The adjustable head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. An improperly adjusted head restraint may provide reduced protection to an occupant during certain rear impacts. Raising the Head Restraint Pull the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. 2. Insert a tool, such as a large paper clip, into the pin hole located on the side of the guide sleeve adjust and release button (D). 3. Press and hold buttons C and D. 4. Pull the head restraint up. Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Installing the Head Restraint Front seat head restraints Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until in locks. Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped) The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: E138642 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. 91 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Seats E190838 Recline Adjustment E144727 WARNING 1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position. MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped) Moving the Seat Backward and Forward WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. E201584 Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged. 92 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Seats Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped) REAR SEATS WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash. E201585 POWER SEATS (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle is in motion may cause loss of control of your vehicle. E201587 Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Lift the handle to adjust the seatback rearward or forward. The seatback can also fold forward until it is flat. Fold-flat Seatback (If Equipped) WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash. E201586 The control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Move the switch in the direction of the arrow to raise or lower the seat cushion or to move the seat forward, backward, up or down. 93 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Seats E201588 Lift the handle and fold the seatback forward until it is flat. Note: For the bench seats, make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback. E201589 Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle until you hear a click. 94 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations Power points may be in the following locations: • On the center console. • Inside the center console. • On the rear of the center console. • In the rear cargo area. WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Note: If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery will run out of charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This will damage the power point and blow the fuse. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Do not use a power point for operating a cigar lighter. Note: Incorrect use of the power points can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is not running. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. 95 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped) OVERHEAD CONSOLE Center Console Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. Available console features include: E75193 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. E208754 A USB or USB and SD card. B Power point. C Cup holder. D Power point. Console Mounting Plates You should only remove and replace the mounting plates during the upfitting process. They should not be removed permanently. Universal Top Tray You can remove the trim on the top of the instrument panel to aid in upfitting aftermarket accessories or mounting equipment. 96 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. E72128 0 (off) - The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. I (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. II (on) - All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. III (start) - cranks the engine. STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. 97 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 4. Start the engine. Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1. Shift into park (P). 2. Turn the key to position 0. 3. Apply the parking brake. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine. Before starting your vehicle, check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in park (P). • Switch the ignition key to position II. 1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and turn the key to position 0. 3. Apply the parking brake. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to position III to start the engine. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short period and try again. WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Shift into park (P). 98 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Important Ventilating Information We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. • Use as short an extension cord as possible. • Do not use multiple extension cords. • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. • Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. • Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. • Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. • Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: • Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm). • Set your climate control to outside air. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped) WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage. Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. 99 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. 100 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. • Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. • Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. Always turn off the vehicle before refueling. 101 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. Fuel and Refueling • FUEL QUALITY Choosing the Right Fuel • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is prohibited by law). The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. E161513 Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. We recommend regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. We do not recommend fuels with an octane rating below 87. FUEL QUALITY - E85 For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to provide improved performance, we recommend premium fuel for severe duty usage such as trailer tow. Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles Do not use any fuel other than those recommended because they could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended can impair the emission control system and cause a loss of vehicle performance. E161513 Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. Use regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87, or regular unleaded gasoline blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow fuel filler cap or the fuel tank filler pipe will have a yellow housing or bezel. Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended. 102 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Do not use any fuel other than those recommended because they could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended can impair the emission control system and cause a loss of vehicle performance. If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel may be required. • You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E100 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). • Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is prohibited by law). Filling a Portable Fuel Container Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. • Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel system filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare wheel storage tray. 103 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel tank filler pipe opening. 5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close the fuel tank filler door. 6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back in your vehicle or properly dispose of it. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. WARNINGS Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the plastic funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 103). REFUELING Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. WARNINGS Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. 1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove the fuel tank filler cap. Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fuel tank filler cap. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. 2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel tank filler pipe opening. Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. E157452 104 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling WARNINGS Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place approved fuel container on the ground. • Do not fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • Do not use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. E156032 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle. Hold handle higher during insertion for easier access. Leave the fuel pump nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping. Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. When fueling your vehicle: E154765 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages. 4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully close the fuel tank filler door. Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain through the drain hole and drip onto the ground. If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a service engine warning lamp may appear on the instrument cluster. At the next opportunity, do the following: 105 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and shift the transmission into park (P). 2. Switch the ignition off. 3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening. 4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to allow the inlet to close properly. This will dislodge any debris preventing the inlet from sealing. Filling the Tank If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after 4 or more hours with the engine off) followed by city or highway driving. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well. Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent. 1. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • • • Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy. FUEL CONSUMPTION Empty reserve is the amount of fuel remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. • • • 1. 2. 3. The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the amount of fuel that can be added into the tank after the gauge indicates empty The advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size. See Capacities and Specifications (page 233). It is the combined usable capacity plus the empty reserve. Due to the empty reserve, you may not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank even when the fuel gauge reads empty. 4. 5. 106 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running. Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high) each time the tank is filled. Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used (For Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled). Fuel and Refueling Keep a record for at least 1 month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNINGS Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Conditions • • • • • • • • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried). Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce fuel economy. Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8–10 miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving. Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. Close windows for high speed driving. Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter that will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • • • • Use only the specified fuel listed. Avoid running out of fuel. Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements, or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be the equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 107 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuel and Refueling • Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. • • An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. • You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing Some state/provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples of temporary malfunctions are: 108 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing the vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly the fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 104). driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. Fuel and Refueling If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, you may need to have the vehicle serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II). Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat the above driving cycle. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing. The OBD-II system monitors the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may need to perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: Drive on an expressway or highway for a steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 109 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Transmission Reverse (R) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in park (P). Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Neutral (N) With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. Drive (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through six. Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission Low (L) Putting your vehicle in or out of gear: The low (L) button is located at the end of the column shifter. Activating low (L) gear: • Provides maximum engine braking. • Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches lower speeds. • Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions and results in lower fuel economy. 1. Fully press down the brake pedal. 2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. 3. Come to a complete stop. 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P). If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. E206672 Park (P) This position locks the transmission and prevents the wheels from turning. 110 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Transmission If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 111 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive Note: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) in police vehicles does not require any normal scheduled maintenance. The system is electronically monitored and notifies the driver of required service in the information display. The PTU lube will be more likely to require a fluid change if the vehicle has experienced extended periods of extreme/severe duty cycle driving. Do not check or change the PTU lubricant unless the unit shows signs of leakage or a message indicating required service is displayed. Contact an authorized dealer for service if the PTU was submerged in water and to reset the PTU lube life monitor. USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator. Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty. Note: When an AWD system fault is present, if the system is overheated or if service is required, a message displays in the information display. The display messages, along with the triggering actions and description of the message, are shown in the following table. 112 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive All-Wheel Drive Messages AWD Messages Action / Description AWD OFF Displayed when the system has been automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating. The system will resume normal function and clear this message after cycling the ignition on and off and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system is allowed to cool. AWD Restored Displayed when the all wheel drive system resumes normal function and clears this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools. AWD Temporarily Disabled Displayed when the all wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating. Check AWD Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reduced power light when the system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube Displayed when the system needs its power transfer unit lubrication changed. This message may be set if the vehicle has experienced extended periods of extreme/ severe duty cycle driving. information display. If there is a message in the information display from using a non-full sized spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare Tires A spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used. The AWD system may disable automatically and enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components if a non-full sized tire is installed. This condition may be indicated by a message in the 113 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive replaced road tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system. system is capable of tolerating any combination of new and worn tires of the same original tire size. For example, using 3 worn tread tires and 1 new tread tire all of the same original tire size, can be tolerated by the AWD system. Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched Tires How Utility Vehicles Differ from Other Vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel Drive (AWD) AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system. However, the AWD 114 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability. WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop button and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine. Basic operating principles in special conditions • • If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer. Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement • • • Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle. Emergency Maneuvers • 115 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid "over-driving" your vehicle (that is, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering will All-Wheel Drive • • result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (that is, from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled, the message turns off and normal AWD function returns. In the event the engine is not stopped, the message turns off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns. When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability. Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. Sand Mud and Water Most of the time traction control improves tire traction by managing wheel slip through Brake, Engine, and AWD calibrations. However, during low speed driving, disabling traction control in deep sand can help keep the wheels moving to maintain vehicle momentum. If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time. This could cause the AWD system to overheat and default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs, a message displays in the information display. To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has been 116 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear axle serviced by an authorized dealer. E143950 “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” E143949 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. 117 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing All-Wheel Drive Maintenance and Modifications Driving on Snow and Ice The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks). Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage. AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway usage. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 119). 118 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Brakes Emergency Brake Assist GENERAL INFORMATION Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and an authorized dealer should check them. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, an authorized dealer should check your vehicle. Anti-lock Brake System Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 202). This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. This lamp momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock braking system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 68). E138644 Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately. Brake Over Accelerator E138644 In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Switch the engine off, move the transmission to park (P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal and the area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its movement. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. 119 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Brakes PARKING BRAKE WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is locked in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake and engage park could result in vehicle roll-away, property damage or bodily injury. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate and remains illuminated until the parking brake is released. To release the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down again. If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle may be overloaded. 120 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Traction Control Using the Information Display Controls PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. You can switch this feature off or on in the information display. See General Information (page 73). If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. Using a Switch (If Equipped) Use the traction control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on. The switch illuminates when traction control is off. USING TRACTION CONTROL System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. The stability and traction control light temporarily illuminates on E138639 engine start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems. The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on: • • The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Switching the System Off When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status. You can switch the system off by either using the information display controls or the switch. 121 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing When you switch the traction control system off. If a problem occurs in either of the systems. Stability Control If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions: PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • • • • • • The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: Electronic Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. Roll Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually. Traction Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 121). The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 122 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. Stability Control B B B A A B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC®) The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off, but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R. You can turn off the traction control portion of the system independently. See Using Traction Control (page 121). 123 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Parking Aids PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: The sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey is present. WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. Certain objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. Note: If you attach certain add-on devices such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing system may detect that add-on device and therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that you disable the rear sensing system when you attach an add-on device to your vehicle to prevent these warnings. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See (page 73). To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you can use the parking aid switch to switch the system off. This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging your vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 76). REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped) Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system, may create false beeps. The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 124 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Parking Aids Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The distance indicator displays when the transmission is in reverse (R). The indicator displays: • As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. • If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are greyed out. E130178 Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. REAR VIEW CAMERA WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle. Use caution when using the rear video camera and the luggage compartment door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the luggage compartment door is ajar. The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper. Use caution when turning camera features on or off. Make sure your vehicle is not moving. 125 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Parking Aids The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle. During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle. Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment door or liftgate is open, no rear view camera features will display. Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector. E142435 The camera is located on the luggage compartment door. Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating. • Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. You can also use the rear washer to clean the camera. See Rear Window Wiper and Washers (page 56). • The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. Camera Guidelines Note: Active guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). 126 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Parking Aids A B C D The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight. E Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle. Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. F Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). E142436 A Active guidelines (If equipped) B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper Note: When you enable manual zoom, only the centerline is shown. Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF. This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If you change the steering wheel position while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. Camera System Settings To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the following selections in the multifunctional display when the transmission is not in reverse (R): 127 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Parking Aids Rear Camera Delay Main Menu Settings Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. Vehicle The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. Camera Settings When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: • Your vehicle speed reaches approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). • You shift your vehicle into park (P). Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The system uses red, yellow and green highlights that appear on top of the video image when any of the sensing systems detect an object. Vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch™ The system will provide an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will highlight green, yellow and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. The coverage area is up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There is decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. E130178 For additional information of the zone coverage and the rear sensing system. See Rear Parking Aid (page 124). 128 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Cruise Control Setting the Cruise Speed PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press and release SET+. Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator will change color. Note: Cruise control disengages if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed while driving uphill. USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Changing the Set Speed • When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning displays. • • Press and release SET+ or SET-. When you select kph as the display measurement in the information display, the set speed changes in approximately 1 kph increments. When you select mph as the display measurement in the information display, the set speed changes in approximately 1 mph increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+. Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. E200995 The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Canceling the Set Speed Switching Cruise Control On Press and release CAN or tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed. Press and release ON. Resuming the Set Speed The indicator appears in the instrument cluster. Press and release RES. E71340 129 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control Off Press and release OFF when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off. Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. 130 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Aids Using the System BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM The Blind Spot Information System turns on when you start the engine and you drive your vehicle forward above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). WARNING Do not use the system as a replacement for using the mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. You should only use the system as an aid. It is not a replacement for careful driving. Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not function in reverse (R) or park (P) or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on. System Lights and Messages A A E142442 The system displays a yellow warning indicator located in the exterior mirrors. E124788 The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is a convenience feature that assists you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper. The system is designed to alert you if other vehicles enter the blind spot zone when driving. Note: It will dim when the ambient light decreases. System Sensors WARNING Prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and issuing a warning, the number of missed objects will increase. Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not prevent contact with other vehicles or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees). It's only designed to alert you to vehicles in the blind zones. Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present; this is rare and known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked condition either self-corrects or clears after a key cycle. Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind spot zone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds) will not trigger the alert. 131 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Aids If the blockage is still present after the key cycle and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage. Reasons for messages being displayed The radar Clean the fascia area in front surface is of the radar or remove the dirty or obstruction. obstructed E205199 Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state. Heavy rainfall or snowfall interferes with the radar signals No action required. The system automatically resets to an unblocked state once the rainfall or snowfall rate decreases or stops. Do not use the Blind Spot Information System in these conditions. Detection Limitations The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas, this can cause degraded system performance. There may be instances where the system will not always detect vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zone. Instances which may cause non-detection: • Debris build up on the rear bumper panels in the area of the sensors. • Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zone. • Vehicles passing through the blind spot zone at high speed. • Severe weather conditions. • Several vehicles passing through the blind spot zone following each other closely. If the system detects a degraded performance condition, a message warning of a blocked sensor or low visibility will appear in the information display along with a warning indicator. You can clear the information display warning but the warning indicator will remain illuminated. When you remove a blockage, you can reset the system in two ways: • While driving, the system detects at least two objects. • You cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on. 132 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing The radar surface is not dirty or obstructed Driving Aids The Blind Spot Information System cannot be switched off when MyKey is used. False Alerts Note: If your vehicle has a trailer tow module approved by us, the system will detect a connected trailer and turn off. For non-factory equipped tow bars, you may want to turn the Blind Spot Information System off manually. You can have the Blind Spot Information System switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. There may be certain instances when there is a false alert by the system that illuminates the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are temporary and self-correct. CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT WARNING To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a replacement for careful driving. Detection Errors If the system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the Blind Spot Information System warning indicator will illuminate and a message will appear in the information display. Cross traffic alert is designed to warn you of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in reverse (R). All other system faults will display only with a message in the information display. See Information Messages (page 76). Using the System Switching the Systems Off and On Cross traffic alert turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). Once shifted out of reverse (R), cross traffic alert turns off. You can temporarily switch off the Blind Spot Information System in the information display. See (page 73). When you switch off the Blind Spot Information System, you will not receive alerts and the information display will display a system off message. Note: Cross traffic alert is designed to detect vehicles that approach with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. Note: The Blind Spot Information System will remember the last selected on or off setting. 133 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Aids E142440 In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone coverage to the right is nearly maximized. E142441 134 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Aids The following are other situations that may limit the cross traffic alert system performance: • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors. • Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • Backing out of an angled parking spot. Zone coverage decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely limited. System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts False Alerts Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a factory equipped trailer tow module and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will automatically turn the cross traffic alert off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is recommended to turn the cross traffic alert off manually. Operating cross traffic alert with a trailer attached will cause poor cross traffic alert system performance. E142442 Cross traffic alert illuminates an amber alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. Cross traffic alert also sounds an audible alert and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left. Cross traffic alert works with the reverse sensing system that sounds its own series of tones. See Principle of Operation (page 124). There may be certain instances when there is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert system that illuminates the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are temporary and self-correct. System Errors If cross traffic alert senses a problem with the left or right sensor, a message will appear in the information display. See (page 73). System Sensors The system uses radar sensors that are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas, as this can cause degraded system performance. Switching the System Off and On You can temporarily switch cross traffic alert off in the information display. See (page 73). When you switch cross traffic alert off, you will not receive alerts and the information display will display a system off message. System Limitations Cross traffic alert has its own limitations; situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection. 135 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Aids Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle. This increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. Note: The cross traffic alert system always switches on whenever the ignition is switched on and ready to provide appropriate alerts when the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross Traffic Alert will not remember the last selected on or off setting. You can have cross traffic alert switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off permanently, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Correct tire pressures. • Uneven tire wear. • Loose or worn suspension components. • Loose or worn steering components. • Improper vehicle alignment. STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNINGS The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. Adaptive Learning The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Obtain immediate service from an authorized dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. Your vehicle has an electric power steering system. There is no fluid reservoir. No maintenance is required. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort. 136 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES (If Equipped) WARNING When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. The maximum recommended load, evenly distributed on the crossbars, is: • 100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a moonroof. • 45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a moonroof. E203068 Use the key to lock and unlock the door. Turn the handle to open it. REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE For correct roof rack system function, you must place loads directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. When using the roof rack system, we recommend you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle. Load Safe Label Refer to the label on the trunk lid or liftgate for additional information about the spare wheel and tire. Make sure that you securely fasten the load. Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop. Load Floor Do not permanently remove the foam structure under the load floor that surrounds the spare tire. It is necessary to properly support the load floor. Thumbwheel Kit The maximum load floor cargo weight, evenly distributed and with a full size spare tire installed, is 800 lb (362 kg). E203659 137 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying 4. Replace and tighten the bolts at both sides of the crossbar by using the supplied torx tool or a similar tool. Note: There may be snap caps in the new side rail position, which must be removed before installing the crossbar. These caps can be removed by using the supplied torx tool or a similar tool. A thumbwheel kit is included in your vehicle for tying light loads to your roof. The kit is located in the glovebox. Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time you add or remove load from the roof rack, and periodically while traveling. Make sure that the load is secure before traveling. Note: There may be snap caps in the side rail, which must be removed before installing the thumbwheels. These caps can be removed by using a T25 torx tool or a similar tool. LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped) This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer or both, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label: Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment. Note: For less wind noise and better aerodynamics, only install the crossbars when you need them for carrying cargo. Follow the steps to reposition or remove the rear crossbar. You can remove the front crossbar fasteners by unscrewing the assembly. E203063 1. Remove the crossbar bolts at both sides of the front crossbar by using the supplied torx tool or a similar tool. 2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the ends off of the side rails. 3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail position and slide onto rail. 138 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying PAYLOAD E143816 WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. Payload - is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door (vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed equipment on the vehicle, you must subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload. Example only: E210944 139 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying E210945 CARGO E143817 Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. Cargo Weight - includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight. GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance 140 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying GVW E143818 Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The Gross Vehicle Weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus passengers. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). It is shown on the Example only: E198828 141 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. GCW GVW E143819 towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The Gross Combined Weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with mandatory options, driver and front passenger weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each), no cargo weight (internal or external) and a tongue load of 10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the 142 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity: Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight - refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch. Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268 kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds (227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms). WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Steps for determining the correct load limit: 143 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying *Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. *Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. 144 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Load Carrying Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 145 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. • Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. • Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual. See Load Limit (page 138). You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See the Fuses chapter. Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation. 146 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes. Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart. RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note: Do not tow a trailer during patrol or pursuit situations. Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below. Note: Be sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 20 feet² (1.86 meters²). Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter) elevation point. Engine Maximum trailer weight 3.5L GTDI 4WD 2500 lb (1134 kg) 3.7L TiVCT 4WD 2500 lb (1134 kg) 147 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing Weight-distributing Hitches ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS WARNING Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). • Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. • See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. • Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information. • If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury. When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use the following procedure: 1. 2. You can find information on load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label as well as instructions on calculating your vehicle's load in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 138). 3. 4. Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. 5. Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. 6. Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the tongue. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender. This is H1. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars connected. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender a second time. This is H2. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender is approximately half the way down from H2, toward H1. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2-6. When the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle: • Lock the bar tension adjuster in place. • Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch. • Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer. 148 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing Safety Chains Trailer Lamps Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper. WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. WARNING Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles. Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. When Towing a Trailer • The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. • • Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms) when loaded. • • 149 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles (800 kilometers). Do not make full-throttle starts. Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers). When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. Towing • • • • Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade: Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • Causing internal damage to the components. • Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required. TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE 1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow. 2. Set your vehicle parking brake. 3. Place the automatic transmission in position P. 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included with vehicle.) Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC) Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. E143886 If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. 150 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™/3.7L Emergency Towing If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies or vehicle transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Place the transmission in neutral (N). If you cannot move the transmission into neutral (N), you may need to override it. See Transmission (page 110). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km). Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground. When towing in this manner, the rear wheels can remain on the ground. Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission. WARNING Towing a four-wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission, four-wheel drive system and vehicle. If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. Recreational Towing Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate Control (page 86). 151 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing 3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the ignition key past the accessory position. The key position is between the accessory and off positions. See Ignition Switch (page 97). 4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 187). Note: The anti-theft system does not work until you reconnect the battery cable. Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. You can tow your 3.5L EcoBoost or 3.7L Duratec (6F50 or 6F55 transmission) equipped vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground: • Tow only in the forward direction. • Release the parking brake. All Vehicles • • Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then pressing the keyless start button until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the gearshift into neutral (N). 3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the keyless start button once. 4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. You need the door key to lock and unlock doors when the battery cable is disconnected. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 187). Note: The anti-theft system does not work until you reconnect the battery cable. Front-wheel Drive Vehicles Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. Alternatively, you can tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do not tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground. This causes damage to your four-wheel drive system. If you are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider. Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then turning the ignition key until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission into neutral (N). 152 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h). Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours thereafter. With the engine running and your foot on the brake, shift into drive (D) and then into reverse (R) before shifting back into neutral (N). Driving Hints Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel economy: • Sudden accelerations or hard accelerations. • Revving the engine before turning it off. • Idle for periods longer than one minute. • Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Use the air conditioner or front defroster. • Use the speed control in hilly terrain. • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer. • Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of weight carried). • Driving with the wheels out of alignment. BREAKING-IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). ECONOMICAL DRIVING Your fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under, and how you maintain your vehicle. You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these things in mind: • Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Drive at steady speeds without stopping. • Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. • Close the windows for high-speed driving. • Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. • Use the recommended engine oil. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed (if equipped). • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8–10 miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. 153 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Hints • • • • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. Close the windows for high-speed driving. • • • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. FLOOR MATS (If Equipped) WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle. Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position. Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation. E176360 When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: 154 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Driving Hints WARNINGS Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement. Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control. E142666 To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. 155 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Roadside Emergencies authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • • Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. 24 hours a day, seven days a week. For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare, if provided with the vehicle (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30.5 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. • Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance For your convenience, you may complete the roadside assistance identification card found in the centerfold of your warranty guide and retain for future reference. 156 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Roadside Emergencies Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. The hazard warning button is located on the instrument panel. Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. • Sykes Assistance Services Corporation administers the Roadside Assistance program. You must receive covered services in Canada or the continental United States. Coverage extends to vehicles that use public, non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways. Roadside Assistance coverage does not extend to vehicles involved in cross-country driving, logging, autocross and any other form of off-road use. Well maintained roads and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the supplier, and allow their representatives to perform service as per the standard operating procedures. • FUEL SHUTOFF WARNING Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury. Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision. In Remote Locations In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff. If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by road to the nearest authorized dealership, transportation by rail or water may be necessary. The program covers a tow to the dock or rail terminal and also to the dealership at the end of the trip. Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles equipped with a key system: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel pump. For rail or water transportation, however, contact your authorized dealer to confirm if you are eligible for additional coverage before you authorize or pay for the service. Call Ford Roadside Assistance at 1-800-665-2006 for additional information. For vehicles equipped with a push button start system: 1. Press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition. 2. Press the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to switch on the ignition. HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Note: If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. 157 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function, and the front and rear direction indicators will flash. Press the button again to turn them off. Roadside Emergencies Preparing Your Vehicle 3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition. 4. You can either attempt to start the engine by pressing the brake pedal and the START/STOP button, or switch on the ignition only by pressing the START/STOP button without pressing the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the fuel system. Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once your vehicle determines that the systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact an authorized dealer. Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNINGS Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle. Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. 158 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Roadside Emergencies Jump Starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately, or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 1 3 4 Removing the Jumper Cables 2 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 4 E142664 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available. 2 3 E142665 1. 159 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing 1 Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle. Roadside Emergencies 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery. 5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. The horn and indicators will turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. 160 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Telephone 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Online www.ford.ca Away From Home Twitter If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: In the United States: Mailing address 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing authorized dealer. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48121 Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) Online Additional information and resources are available online at www.fordowner.com 161 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first: 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. 162 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have 163 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 Fax: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford.com CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673). GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: prcac@ford.com www.ford.com.pr If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact: 164 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Center 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Ford: 80004443673 Lincoln: 80004441067 If calling from the UAE: 80004441066 If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 8008443673 If calling from Kuwait: 22280384 www.helminc.com Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual FAX: +971 4 3327266 Email: menacac@ford.com www.me.ford.com French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service 165 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Customer Assistance If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada. Administrator Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm Phone 1–800–333–0510 166 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNINGS Always disconnect the battery before servicing high-current fuses. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 187). To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. E193713 167 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 1 20A 1 Powertrain control module power. 2 20A 1 Engine emissions (MIL). 3 20A 1 4 20A 1 5 — Not used. 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 — Not used. 9 — A/C clutch control relay coil. VACC. Ignition coils. Not used. 10 15A 11 — 12 40A 13 — 14 — 1 Heated mirrors. Right hand side electronic cooling fan 3 relay. 2 Heated rear window. Not used. Powertrain control module relay. 15 1 20A Horn relay power. 16 10A 1 A/C clutch relay power. 17 — Rear heated window and heated mirrors relay. 18 — Rear blower motor relay. 19 — Not used. 20 — Left hand side cooling fan relay. 21 — 22 25A 23 — Cooling fans series/parallel relay. 2 Electronic fan relay 2. Not used. 168 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 24 — 25 — Protected components Not used. Not used. 2 26 30A Anti-lock brake system valves. 27 40A 2 Police power tap #1. 28 — Not used. 29 — Run/start relay. 30 — Not used. 31 10A 32 10A 33 10A 34 10A 35 — Not used. 36 — Blower motor relay. 37 — Not used. 38 — A/C compressor clutch relay. 39 — Horn relay. 40 — 1 Electric power-assisted steering. 1 Anti-lock brake system module. 1 Powertrain control module (ISPR). 1 Blind spot information system. Rear camera. Not used. 41 40A 42 — 2 Rear blower motor. Not used. 2 43 40A Front blower motor. 44 50A 3 Voltage quality module bus. 45 40A 3 Electric fan relay 1. 46 50A 3 Police rear power outlet #1. 47 — Not used. 169 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 48 50A 49 — 3 Protected components Body control module RP1 bus. Not used. 50 50A 3 Body control module RP2 bus. 51 50A 3 Electric fan relay 3. 52 60A 3 Anti-lock brake system pump. 53 50A 3 Police rear power outlet #2. 54 — Not used. 55 40A 56 40A 2 Police power tap #3. 2 Police power tap #2. 57 — Not used. 58 — Not used. 59 30A 60 20A 61 — 62 20A 63 30A 64 — Not used. 65 — Not used. 66 — Not used. 2 Passenger seat power. 2 Power point #1 (instrument panel). Not used. 2 Power point #2(instrument panel). 2 Fuel pump. 67 — Not used. 68 — Not used. 69 — Not used. 70 20A 71 — 2 Trailer tow left-hand and right-hand stop and direction indicator lamps. Not used. 170 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 72 20A 73 30A 74 — 75 30A 76 — Not used. 77 — Not used. 78 — Not used. 79 30A 80 — 2 Police power transfer unit cooler. 2 Driver seat power. Not used. 2 2 81 5A 82 — Protected components Front wiper motor. Starter relay. Not used. Police start. 1 Not used. 83 10A 84 — 85 20A 86 — Not used. 87 — Not used. 88 — Not used. 89 20A 90 — Not used. 91 — Not used. 92 15A 93 10A 94 15A 95 15A 1 Brake on/off switch. Not used. 1 1 Police run/start #2. Police run/start #1. 1 Police adjustable pedals. 1 Alternator sense. 1 Rear washer relay. 1 Rear wiper relay. 171 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses 1 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 96 10A 97 — 98 20A 1 Police spot light. 99 20A 1 Trailer tow parking lamp relay. 1 Protected components Powertrain control module relay coil power. Not used. Micro fuse. 2 M-type fuse. 3 J-type fuse. Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece. Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. E145984 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 1 10A 1 Protected components Demand lamps. Battery saver. 172 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components Police battery saver tap-in (14-way). 2 — Not used. 3 20A 4 5A 5 20A 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 — 1 Driver unlock relay. Police brake on/off tap-in. 1 1 Police battery feed #2. Not used. 9 10A 10 — 11 5A 12 7.5A 13 7.5A 14 — 15 10A 16 — 1 Police battery feed #3. Not used. Rear climate control module. 2 2 2 Front climate control module. Instrument cluster. Smart data link. Steering column control module. Not used. 2 Smart datalink connector power. Not used. 17 5A Electronic finish panel. 18 5A 19 7.5A 20 7.5A 21 5A 2 Humidity sensor. 22 5A 2 Occupant classification sensor. 2 Ignition switch. Key inhibit. 2 2 Transmission control switch (Police low gear). 2 Police SWIM module. 173 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses 1 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating 23 10A 24 20A 25 30A 26 30A 27 — 28 20A 29 — Not used. 30 — Not used. 31 — 1 Protected components Delayed accessory power. Power windows. Police D/A tap-in (14-way). 1 Central lock relay. 1 Left-hand front smart window motor. 1 Right-hand front smart window motor. Not used. 1 Police battery feed #1. Not used. 32 10A 33 20A 34 30A 35 5A 36 15A 37 — 38 30A 1 SYNC. GPS module. Display. 1 Radio. 1 Run/start relay. Restrain control module. 1 EC mirrors. 1 Not used. 3 Left-hand front window motor. Rear power window motors. Micro fuse. 2 Dual micro fuse. 3 Circuit breaker. 174 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING You must replace a failed fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. If you use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, you may cause severe wire damage and may start a fire. E142430 A fuse may fail if electrical components in the vehicle are not properly working. A broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 175 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine Off GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. Working with the Engine On WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Block the wheels If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. 176 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 2 Opening the Hood 3 E203009 3. Move the catch to the left. 1 E203008 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 2. Slightly lift the hood. 177 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance 4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut. Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly after use. 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under its own weight for the last 8–12 in (20–30 cm). Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed. 4 E203320 178 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW A E188731 A H B G F D C J E Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181). B Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 186). C Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 187). D Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 167). E Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 197). F Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 180). G Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). H Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 187). J Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 185). 179 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. E146429 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL CHECK Note: Check the level before starting the engine. 1. Remove the filler cap. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. 3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 4. Wipe off any spilled oil. 5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately. Adding Engine Oil Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator. Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. 180 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance WARNINGS Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. From the main menu scroll to: Message Action and description Settings Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Vehicle Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. Checking the Engine Coolant When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). Reset Successful When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. Remaining Life {00}% Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant immediately. Not Reset Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Reset Cancelled ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations. WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. 181 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze or coolant. Adding Engine Coolant Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants or additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Your warranty may not cover these damages. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. When adding coolant: 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. 3. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. 4. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level. Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty. Use prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, qualified personnel: Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. 1. Must drain the cooling system. 2. Chemically clean the cooling system with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush. 3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as possible. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Water alone, without engine coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 182 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Severe Climates the service engine soon indicator will illuminate. If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. When this occurs, your vehicle will still operate. However: • The engine power will be limited. • This will disable the air conditioning system. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • A coolant concentration of 40% provides improved overheat protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. What You Should Know About FailSafe Cooling If you deplete the engine coolant supply, fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before you incur incremental component damage. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area and: the coolant temperature warning light will illuminate 183 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle will not maintain high-speed operation and the engine will operate poorly. At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP message may appear in the information display. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power. In order to manage the engine fluid temperatures, your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on many factors such as vehicle loading, towing, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. You can continue to drive your vehicle while this message is active. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine. 2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level and add if low. 5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle to an authorized dealer. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to a normal operating temperature, the air conditioning will turn on once again. If the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display: Engine Fluid Temperature Management (If Equipped) WARNINGS To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures reduce. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and shift the transmission into P. 2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle moves away from the red (hot) area. After several minutes, if the temperature does not drop, follow the remaining steps. 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant level. 4. If the coolant level is normal, restart your engine and continue. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because of the added load, your vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep grade while pulling a trailer in high temperatures. 184 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance 5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and restart the engine. See Adding Engine Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling Works in this chapter for more information. A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ E190273 WARNING Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. A Minimum. B Maximum. Note: Check the fluid level with the engine running and the transmission in park (P). 1. 2. The transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips or shifts slowly you should check the fluid level. If you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer. 3. 4. Checking the Transmission Fluid Level WARNING The dipstick and surrounding components are hot. Use gloves when moving components and checking the transmission fluid level. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. 5. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. See Under Hood Overview (page 179). Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add fluid immediately. See Adding Transmission Fluid. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Low Fluid Level If the fluid level is within the minimum range (below point A) add the correct specification fluid to be within the hash mark area. See Capacities and Specifications (page 238). Only check the transmission fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C). Normal operating temperature is reached after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km). Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A low fluid level can damage the transmission. 185 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing B Maintenance Correct Fluid Level BRAKE FLUID CHECK If the fluid level is within the hash mark area (between points A and B) do not add any fluid. WARNINGS Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. High Fluid Level If the fluid level is above the maximum range (above point B) fluid may need to be removed. High fluid levels may be caused by a overheating condition. If you have operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking the level. Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Note: An overfill condition can damage the transmission. Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. Adding Transmission Fluid 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Add fluid that meets the Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 238). Pour the fluid directly into the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick hole. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately. 186 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. E170684 To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid. Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. WASHER FLUID CHECK When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. 187 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle, the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. WARNINGS Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically-controlled by a computer, some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery. Some engine computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy, optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Some other computer settings, like the clock and radio station presets, are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery. When a technician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery, these settings are erased. Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings: Note: See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access, testing, or replacement. When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary, see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Shift into park (P). 3. Switch off all accessories. 4. Fully press the brake pedal and start the vehicle. 188 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. See Audio System (page 247). Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 63). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 247). 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. If the engine turns off, press the accelerator pedal to start the engine. 7. While the engine is running, press the brake pedal and shift into neutral (N). 8. Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal. 9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. Replace wiper blades annually for optimum performance. Front Wiper Blades Lift the wiper arms away from the windshield. 1 1 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. E129990 2 1. Press the locking buttons together. 2. Remove the wiper blade. 3. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when you switch the ignition on. CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Rear Wiper Blade Lift the wiper arms away from the rear window. E142463 189 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance E142592 E183236 1. Remove the wiper blade. 2. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. A 8 ft (2.4 m) B Ground to the center of the headlamp high beam bulb C 25 ft (7.6 m) D Horizontal reference line Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure 1. Park your vehicle on level ground approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall or screen. 2. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of the headlamp high beam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) long horizontal reference line on the wall or screen at this height. Note: There may be an identifying mark on the lens to help you locate the center line of the headlamp high beam bulb. Refer to the graphic below step 4. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the aim of the headlamp beam checked by an authorized dealer. Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps and open the hood. 190 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance 5 E142465 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the flat zone of high intensity light is not on the horizontal reference line, adjust the aim of the headlamp beam. E203691 5. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn the adjuster clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line. 6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps. 191 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Headlamp REMOVING A HEADLAMP A B E203696 E203692 To gain access to the headlamp securing bolts and to remove the headlamp assembly, you must first remove the front fascia and front bumper assemblies. We recommend you see an authorized dealer. A Headlamp high beam. B Front direction indicator. Front Direction Indicator CHANGING A BULB WARNINGS Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury. 2 Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 195). Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. 3 4 E203698 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 192 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped) 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. Headlamp High Beam 2 E203699 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the housing cover. Note: To remove push pins, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center release pin. 4 4 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3 E203697 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Carefully remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. E174588 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. 193 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp 2 A B 5 3 6 E203701 4 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the screw covers. 3. Remove the retaining bolts from the lamp assembly. 4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. E203702 5. Release the wire from the securing clip. 6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 7. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. LED Lamps LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail. The following lamps are LED: • Front side marker lamps. • Daytime running lamps. If Equipped. • Headlamp low beam. • Rear side marker lamp. • Brake and rear lamp. • Central high mounted brake lamp. 194 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance License Plate Lamp 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. 1 2 3 E203703 Exterior Lamps Lamp Specification Power (Watt) Front park lamps. LED LED Front side marker lamp. LED LED LED LED 3757NA 27 LED LED Headlamp low beam. LED LED Headlamp high beam. 9005LL 65 Front auxillary warning lamp. LED LED Exterior mirror warning lamp. LED LED Rear side marker lamp. LED LED Rear quarter window warning lamp. LED LED Front warning lamp. 1 Front direction indicator. Daytime running lamps. If Equipped. 195 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance Lamp Specification Power (Watt) Rear auxillary warning lamp. LED LED Brake and rear lamp. LED LED Central high mounted brake lamp. LED LED Rear direction indicator. 1 WY21W 21 Reversing lamp. W21W 21 License plate lamp. W5W 5 LED lamp when optional Warn, Park, Turn lamp is fitted. Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. Interior Lamps Specification Power (Watt) Glove compartment lamp. Lamp 194 4 Map lamp. 168 5 Vanity mirror lamp. A6224PF Rear Dome Lamp. 2 Second and third row task lamp. Second and third row task lamp - White LED. Second and third row task lamp - Red LED. LED LED 12854 10 White LED LED Red LED LED 2 Conventional bulb. Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. 196 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Maintenance CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER 6 WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. When changing the engine air filter, do not allow debris or foreign material to enter the air induction system. Engine components are susceptible to damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. 2 Change the air filter element at the correct interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). 1 Incorrect component use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See Capacities and Specifications (page 238). x2 E200522 To replace the air filter element do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 197 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Remove the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and that you have a good seal. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is not properly seated. Install the air filter housing cover. Engage the clips to secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing. Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. CLEANING PRODUCTS • For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: • Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42) • Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) • Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) • Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24) • Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20) • Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A) • Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101) • Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100) • Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)] • Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only) (ZC-32-B2) • Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54) • Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-56) • Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14) • Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23) • Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A) • • • • Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. Exterior Chrome Parts • • • 198 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Never wash your vehicle when is hot to the touch, or during strong or direct sunlight. Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Vehicle Care Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. • Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. Exterior Plastic Parts For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. • • Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) Do not use a commercial or high-pressure sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and graphics. This can damage them and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle surface. CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. • • • Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. 199 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. Vehicle Care • • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision. CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. • • • Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. 200 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. Vehicle Care 1. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS 2. WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. 3. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 201). 4. Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas. 5. • 6. • • • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If Equipped) Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. For cleaning and removing stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces: 201 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. Vehicle Care Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty cleaners in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time. You should: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents. Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. • Household cleaners. • Alcohol solutions. • Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs. Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you: • REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. • • Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. • VEHICLE STORAGE Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS (If Equipped) We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers. 202 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply using manufacturer's instructions. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process. To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Vehicle Care General • • • • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. • Fuel system • Body • • • • • • • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. • • • Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Battery • • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected. Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Brakes • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Tires • 203 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Cooling system Engine • With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. Maintain recommended air pressure. Vehicle Care Miscellaneous • • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Removing Vehicle From Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. • If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. 204 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners GENERAL INFORMATION Use only approved wheel and tire sizes, using other sizes could damage your vehicle. If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have the system reprogrammed. If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted by the manufacturer, you can check the suitability with an authorized dealer. WARNINGS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford recommended pressures, never overload or improperly load your vehicle, and make sure every passenger is properly restrained. Additional information related to the functionality and maintenance of your tires can be found later in this chapter. See Tire Care (page 207). In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressures can be found on the Tire Label, which is located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. This information can also be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door last post; next to the driver’s seating position). Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. Ford strongly recommends maintaining these tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced fuel economy, and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold. Note: Check your tire pressures at least once per month. Set the pressure for your spare tire to the highest value given for your vehicle and tire size combination (if equipped). E145298 205 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Study your owner's manual and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: E145299 • • • 206 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Higher - to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Shorter - to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase. Narrower - to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use. Wheels and Tires TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2). E168583 As a result of the above dimensional differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition. These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. 207 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Traction AA A B C WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 208 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. * B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Glossary of Tire Terminology *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tires size and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. 209 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. Information on P Type Tires C D E F B G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) 210 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Letter rating Speed rating M 81 mph (130 km/h) N 87 mph (140 km/h) Q 99 mph (159 km/h) R 106 mph (171 km/h) S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) U 124 mph (200 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Speed rating W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. 211 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Letter rating Wheels and Tires J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: *Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. 212 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C Information on T Type Tires A T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. D E142544 B LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. 213 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires B C C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. D A E Recommended Tire Pressures and Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 214 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. You will find a Tire Label containing the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure by the tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is also found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. WARNING Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increase sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control, and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear flat. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire 215 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Tire Wear E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm). 216 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. Age WARNING Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. Tire Replacement Requirements You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. 217 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires WARNINGS is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. WARNINGS 1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. 2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. 4. Use both eye and ear protection. For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: 218 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Highway Hazards The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, your system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. Safety Practices WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. *Observe posted speed limits *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns *Avoid potholes and objects on the road *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking 219 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. Front-wheel drive vehicles Tire Rotation Note: If your tires show uneven wear, ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. E142547 4-wheel drive vehicles E142548 220 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Tire storage Vehicles equipped with directional tires Most high performance tires are made with a nylon overlay. As such, the following steps should be taken to avoid flatspotting when the vehicles are not used for a period of time. • Fleets should store the vehicles with 44 psi (303 kPa) in the tires. • If the vehicle is stored for periods longer than 30 days, you should move it several feet at least once during each 30-day period, so that a different portion of the tread contacts the ground. • Tire pressure should be reduced to the recommended pressure shown on the vehicle certification label before the vehicle is placed back into service. E70415 Police Wheels and Tires Wheel rims To withstand the demands placed on vehicles driven under heavy duty service conditions, Ford Motor Company installs heavy duty wheels. Tires Tires (including the spare) are speed-rated radials for police use. Use only the recommended tire size and speed ratings. In regions with snow and ice during the winter months, installation of snow tires may be desirable. Snow tires will usually exhibit a drop in dry pavement handling, but may show an increase in snow and ice traction. When snow tires are used, they should be installed on all four wheels, never on the drive wheels only. USING SUMMER TIRES Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, we do not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 45°F (7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow 221 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, we recommend using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size, load index, and speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury, and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also strongly advised to follow the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Always store your summer tires indoors at temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The rubber compounds used in these tires lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below 20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm them in a heated space to at least 40ºF (5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle with the tires installed, or checking tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters or heating devices used to warm the room where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires. Always inspect the tires after storage periods and before use. The tires on your vehicle (excluding the 265/45ZR20 Sport Tire) may have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates you may need to use snow chains. Your vehicle may not be compatible with snow chain or cable usage with the factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only certain chains or snow cables have been approved by Ford as safe for use on your vehicle with the following wheel and tire combination(s): 18”x8”x44mm Wheel and P245/60 R18 Tire. You should only install chains or cables that have been rated as 10 mm or less in dimension as measured on the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class snow chains meet these restrictions. Chains of this size restriction will include a 222 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires tensioning device. The chains should be mounted in pairs on the front tires only. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specification) be used, as chains may chip aluminum wheels. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices • • • • • • If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions. When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less. Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage. Remove the cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use cables on dry roads. If a temporary spare wheel is mounted on your vehicle, do not use snow chains on the axle with the temporary spare tire. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer. 223 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. E142549 Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. 224 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. 225 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure warning light Possible cause Customer action required Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Flashing warning light It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires. 226 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 223). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage. Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired. WARNINGS The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used. The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after use of the sealant. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 223). If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function. 227 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires • 1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall. • 2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY. The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • All-wheel driving capability. When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not: • • • • • • • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label. Tow a trailer. Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time. Use commercial car washing equipment. Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to: • Towing a trailer. • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack. Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • All-wheel driving capability. Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible. Tire Change Procedure WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel To help prevent your vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake, and block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of your vehicle) to the tire being changed. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time. 228 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Use commercial car washing equipment. Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. Wheels and Tires WARNINGS Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. E142551 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. To reduce the risk of possible serious injury or death, do not remove the full size spare tire from the factory secured location. This location is necessary to achieve police-rated 75 mph rear impact crash-test performance. Removal increases the risk of fuel leak in high-speed rear impacts. E194295 4. Turn the two knobs on the floor filler counterclockwise, then remove the floor filler and carpeted floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle. Note: Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle. 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers. 2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. E206671 5. Remove the wing nut securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise. 6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire well. 229 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires 7. Remove the wing nut bolt that secures the jack kit by turning it counterclockwise. 8. Remove the jack kit, which includes the jack, lug wrench, L-shaped bolt and tow recovery hook. 9. Turn the lead screw (where the lug wrench attaches) of the jack by hand to release the lug wrench from the jack. Press the button on the wrench to extend the handle. Fold down the wrench socket. 10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 13. Raise the wheel by turning the jack handle clockwise. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, marking sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 14. 15. 16. 1 4 3 5 E145908 11. 12. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the warning label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points. 2 E75442 17. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 231). Stowing the flat tire 1. E201156 230 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Stand the flat tire vertically in the mini-spare tub with the tire's valve stem facing rearward toward the luggage compartment. Wheels and Tires 4. Unblock the diagonally opposite wheel. Stowing the jack E194296 2. Fasten the flat tire to the luggage compartment back panel by inserting the L-shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt holes in the wheel. 3. Turn the L-shaped bolt clockwise into the threaded hole in the luggage compartment back panel until the tire is secured. E194297 With the road wheel in the vertical position in the spare tire tub, the jack assembly will not fit in its standard position. Secure the jack in the alternate position by inserting the wing bolt through the jack as shown. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. Bolt size lb.ft (Nm) 1/2-20 x 1.5 110 lb.ft (149 Nm) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). 231 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 232 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Engine 3.5L EcoBoost Cubic inches 214 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.033 - 0.037 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm) Compression ratio 10.0:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.5L EcoBoost Engine E191904 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L Engine 3.7L V6 Cubic inches 227 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane or Ethanol (E-85) Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.049 - 0.053 in (0.85 - 0.95 mm) Compression ratio 10.5:1 233 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing 3.7L Engine E191904 MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Component Part Number Air filter element FA-1884 Oil filter FL-500-S Battery BXT-65-750 Spark plugs SP-534 Cabin air filter FP-68 Windshield wiper blade WW-2206 (passenger side) WW-2600 (driver side) Rear window wiper blade WW-1106 We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). 234 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L Component Part Number Air filter element FA-1884 Oil filter FL-500-S Battery BXT-65-750 Spark plugs SP-520 Cabin air filter FP-68 Windshield wiper blade WW-2206 (passenger side) WW-2600 (driver side) Rear window wiper blade WW-1106-PF We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 296). 235 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E142477 E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: 236 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167469 E167814 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Description Code Six-speed automatic transmission 6F55 C Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50 J 237 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel. Item Capacity Engine oil 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant 13.4 qt (12.7 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear axle fluid 2.4 pt (1.15 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F55) 11.6 qt (11 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) * * 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank 18.6 gal (70 L) A/C refrigerant (Without Auxiliary A/C) 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) A/C refrigerant (With Auxiliary A/C) 2.9 lb (1.33 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Without Auxiliary A/C) 5.6 fl oz (165 ml) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (With Auxiliary A/C) 7.3 fl oz (215 ml) Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 238 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFS WSS-M2C946-A Optional Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFS12 WSS-M2C946-A Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A Rear axle fluid (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L WSP-M2C197-A Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV 239 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico) Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL WSL-M2C192-A Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L WSL-M2C192-A Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B 240 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. 241 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel. Item Capacity Engine oil 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant 13.4 qt (12.7 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear axle fluid 2.4 pt (1.15 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F55) 11.6 qt (11 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) * * 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank 18.6 gal (70 L) A/C refrigerant (Without Auxiliary A/C) 1.6 lb (0.74 kg) A/C refrigerant (With Auxiliary A/C) 2.3 lb (1.04 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Without Auxiliary A/C) 5.2 fl oz (155 ml) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (With Auxiliary A/C) 7.9 fl oz (235 ml) Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 242 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-A Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-A Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W20-QFS WSS-M2C945-A Optional Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LFS12 WSS-M2C945-A Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A Rear axle fluid (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L WSP-M2C197-A Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV 243 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico) Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL WSL-M2C192-A Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L WSL-M2C192-A Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5 ESB-M1C93-B 244 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 -- If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. 245 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. 246 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: • AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz • FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode. • MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact an authorized dealer for further information. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. 247 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System • • MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/SYNC WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the .mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to operate the system with the ignition turned off. The system automatically turns off after one hour. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder. 248 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System E194335 A Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. B MUTE Press this button to mute the playing audio. C Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings. D MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. E Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons to enter a phone number. F Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode). 249 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System G Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current track. H TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments. I End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call. J Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. K Cursor arrows Use the arrows to navigate through menus. L OK:Press OK to select an option. M CD Slot Insert a CD. N Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD. O Answer or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming phone call or to make a phone call. P VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume. Q Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track. R PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system. See SYNC™ (page 256). S MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port. T RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions. U CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality DIGITAL RADIO Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 250 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. 251 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential station issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. * There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences 252 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped) SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. E142593 253 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. 254 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Audio System Message Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated Condition Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle. No action required. The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player (page 277). USB PORT (If Equipped) WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E201595 255 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Action SYNC™ (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION E198355 • SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist and applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC * AppLink. • • • • Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). * These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Text message. Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. 256 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Privacy Information Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km). Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. 257 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 272). USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you. Initiating a Voice Session E142599 Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display. Global Voice Commands These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time. Global voice commands (cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds. Help This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions. (main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit. • Helpful Hints • • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. • 258 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. When prompted, say: E142599 Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guidance. Confirmation Prompts Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short question. Phone Confirmation Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls. 259 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then any of the following: phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed. phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. • • Changing the Voice Settings In addition to using voice commands to change the voice settings, you can also use the menu in the audio display. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. To change the voice settings press the Menu button then select: Menu Item SYNC-Settings Pairing a Phone for the First Time Voice settings Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 4000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Using the Audio System Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 260 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Call waiting notification. Caller ID. SYNC™ (If Equipped) 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates there is no paired phone, select the option to add. 3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone to start the pairing process. 4. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the radio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Press the voice and when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description (pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone | Bluetooth audio) | add [a] phone) Follow the instructions on the audio display. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Using Voice Commands Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Pairing Subsequent Phones Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. 3. Select the option for Bluetooth Devices. 4. Press the OK button. 261 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) 5. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. 6. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device. 7. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Voice Command mute [call] [on] 2 (mute [call] off | Unmute [call]) 2 (turn ringer on | silent mode off) (turn ringer off | silent mode [on]) [text] (messages | message) Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. 3 Help ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Mom". 1 See Dial table below. 2 These commands are only valid while in a phone call. Phone Voice Commands E142599 Press the voice button. When prompted, say any of the following: 3 See the text message table below. Dial Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands: Voice Command (phone | Blackberry | iPhone | Mobile) Voice Commands Then say any of the following: 411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one) call (___) 700 (seven hundred) call ___ at home 800 (eight hundred) call ___ ([at] work | [(in | at) [the]] office) 900 (nine hundred) call ___ on (cell | mobile) Clear (deletes all entered digits) call ___ on other Delete (deletes last set of digits entered) dial [[a] number] 1 ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone | privacy on) 2 Number <0-9> (hold call [on] | (put | place) call on hold) 2 join (call | calls) 2 Plus Pound (#) Star (*) 262 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press any button on the audio system. Menu Item Hear it To access text messages say: Making Calls Voice Command [text] (messages | message) Then say any of the following: E142599 (listen to | read) ([text] message) Press the voice button. When prompted, say: forward (text | [text] message) Voice Command reply to (text | [text] message) call (someone | [[a] name]) call [sender] Phonebook Hints dial [[a] number] To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press: SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it. You can then say: When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following: Voice Command (dial | send) This initiates the call. (delete | correct) This erases the spoken digits. To end the call, press the end call button on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display. Receiving Calls Accepting calls When receiving a call, you can answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. 263 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To use the screen to accept a call select: To use the screen to reject a call select: Menu Item Menu Item Reject Accept Ignore the call by doing nothing. Rejecting Calls Phone Options during an Active Call When receiving a call, you can reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, such as putting a call on hold or joining calls. To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select More to choose from the following options: Menu Item Description and action Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the microphone on, select the option again. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is private. Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is on hold. Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad (for example, numbers for passwords). Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty or conference call. 1. Select the More option. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the More option. 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 264 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action 4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access your call history log. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu. 2. Select one of the options available. Accessing Features through the Phone Menu You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings. Display Description and action Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad. Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to access an alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad. 265 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and action Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages. BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete). Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone. Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less. Text Messaging Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message. SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. To hear the message you can say: Voice command Receiving a Text Message Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. (listen to | read) ([text] message) Description and action Select this option to have the system read the message to you. Using the screen you also have the following options: Menu Item Description and action Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox. View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select: More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options: 266 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action Reply to sender Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send. Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the message. Forward msg. Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number. 2. Select the text messaging option, and then press the OK button. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages 1. Press the PHONE button. Choose from the following options: Menu Item Description and action New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages. View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message. Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your text messages. More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cellular phone. 3. Press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you want to send the message. A pre-defined signature appears on each text message. Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox. Sending a Text Message Note: You can only send a text message to one recipient at a time. 1. Select the send option when the desired selection highlights in the audio display. 2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears. 267 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Accessing Your Phone Settings phonebook, and set up automatic download. These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone and text message notification, modify your 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, and then press the OK button. Scroll to select from the following options: Menu Item Description and action Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone as the master when there is more than one cellular phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the Bluetooth Devices menu. Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu. Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone option. 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone. Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to switch the audible tone off or on. Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add, delete or download). Press the OK button to select and scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences table below. 268 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Phonebook preferences Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings. Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system. Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since your last download. When automatic download is off, the system does not download your phonebook when your cellular phone connects to SYNC. You can only access your phonebook, call history and text messages when your paired cellular phone connects to the system. Check or uncheck this option to download your phonebook automatically each time your phone connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears, and then press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as set a phone as primary. Select from the following options: Menu Item Add Phonebook preferences Pair additional phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process. 2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the sixdigit PIN provided by the system in the radio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 269 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Phonebook preferences 4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears, select either yes or no. 5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, the system may prompt you with questions (such as if you want to download your phonebook). Select either yes or no to confirm your responses. Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair it again. Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone as master by selecting the master option and confirming it as the primary. Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous phone disconnects from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time. Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone, you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing process. 2. Select the SYNC settings option, and then press the OK button. System Settings 1. Press the MENU button. 270 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Scroll to select from the following options: Display Description and action Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then press the OK button to change the option's status. Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to factory default settings. Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates. Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation successfully. System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select. Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 258). Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder. You can select media content for playback from this menu. 271 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (If Equipped) Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. • SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible). Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when your vehicle is started and after a previously paired phone connects. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. 911 Assist WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 34). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 156). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. 272 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Setting 911 Assist On or Off • Press the phone button to enter the phone menu then select: • Menu Item Action and Description 911 Assist Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services. Scroll to activate this option then press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. If you choose not to activate this feature you will have the following options: Menu Item Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel". Action and Description Voice Provides a display and voice Reminder reminder at phone connection ON at vehicle start. Voice Provides a display reminder Reminder only without a voice reminder OFF at phone connection. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. To make sure that 911 Assist works properly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • 273 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. SYNC™ (If Equipped) 911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. Note: AppLink is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch system. To Access Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the menu on-screen. Then select: SYNC Mobile Apps Menu Item The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Scroll through the list of available applications and select a particular app or select: Find New Apps Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford website. Accessing an App's Menu When an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button on the steering wheel control to access the app menu. Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region. You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow button on the steering wheel control to exit the app menu. 274 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button then when prompted say: Menu Item Action and Description Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip". mobile (apps | applications) Help Use this command to discover the available voice commands. SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands The following voice commands are always available: Menu Item Action and Description mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC. list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps. find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps. help You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC. When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example: • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status. • To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position. App Permissions App permissions are organized by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. 275 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) • • To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed. To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or location based apps. Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select: Menu Item Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps All Apps You can also select a specific app. If the app supports push notifications, this setting is listed. Select to enable or disable the feature as required. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. App Status You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu. 276 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) There are three possible statuses: Menu Item Action and Description Update Needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. Up-To-Date No update is required. Updating... The system is trying to receive an update. Update settings Menu Item Action and Description Request Update Select this option from the settings menu to manually preform a needed update. Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu to disable automatic updates. Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC. Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications: • USB 2.0. • File format must be FAT16/32. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artist and album. The format of the audio files on the USB device must be: • MP3. • Non DRM protected WMA. • WAV. • AAC. Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 15,000 songs. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod, Zune, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. 277 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. 2. Press the AUX button until an "initializing" message appears in the display. Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu. Press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice Command Action and Description (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See the media voice commands. Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick. To view USB content select: Message Description and Action Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu. Browse USB Message You can browse the files on the USB device in categories. Choose from the following: Albums Genres Message Browse USB Play all Reset USB Playlists Media Voice Commands Songs Press the voice button and when prompted say: Artists E142599 278 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Description and Action (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate [player]) voice commands. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or "what is playing". Command pause play Description and Action Pauses device playback. Resumes device playback. play [album] ___ play all Play all media on the device from the first track to the last. play [artist] ___ play [genre] ___ play [playlist] ___ next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the next track on the current media. previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the previous track on current media. [play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the one currently playing. play [song | track | title | file] ___ repeat off repeat one [on] Repeats the current track. 279 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Command Description and Action shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order. (Not all devices support this command.) shuffle off ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the current track. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles". If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say: Examples of USB Commands Bluetooth Audio SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice. For example, if we have a song called "Penny Lane" from the album "Magical Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song: The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through Bluetooth. • • • • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour". Play "Magical Mystery Tour". To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) or Source button, or press the voice button and when prompted say: Play song "Penny Lane". Play "Penny Lane". Voice Command Bluetooth audio Then any of the following: Voice Command pause play next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] 280 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Media Menu Features shuffle or repeat), find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices. The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, Press AUX to select USB playback. Message Options Description and Action This will enter the media menu. Then any of the following: Message Description and Action Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag. Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library. 2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) to select USB playback. Accessing Your USB Song Library 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Message Browse USB Description and Action This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist or track. If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. 281 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) If there are media files, you have the following options: Display Play all Description and Action Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time * in numerical order. Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears in the display. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL, * or MTP). 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the OK button. Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK button. Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists * * and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK button. Albums Sort all indexed media files by album. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the OK button. Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the OK button. Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not visible.) 1. Press the OK button to select. * * 282 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and Action 2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and then press the OK button. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library. * You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. USB 2 (If Equipped) Using Voice Commands Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console. You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands: You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port. You can access both USB devices by using voice commands. Accessing and Viewing USB Media (browse | search | show) all (album | albums) To access a USB device press the voice button and when prompted say: (browse | search | show) all (artist | artists) Voice command USB 1 (browse | search | show) all (genre | genres) USB 2 (browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it. (browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) (browse | search | show) album ___ Bluetooth Devices and System Settings (browse | search | show) artist ___ (browse | search | show) genre ___ You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 260). (browse | search | show) playlist ___ 283 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Commands for Audio Sources Voice Command ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command. Help E142599 * Press the voice button and when prompted say: If equipped. Radio Voice Commands Voice Command If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then E142599 say any of the commands in the following table. (music | audio | entertainment) [system] Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use. If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) Voice Command Radio [tune [to]] AM 2 Bluetooth (audio | stereo) You can then say any of the following commands. (disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2 [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM]) ((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio video) [tune [to]] AM preset ___ [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___ Radio [tune [to]] FM tune [to] SAT * Sirius * [tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___ (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) 284 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Voice Commands [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___ [tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) tune [to] [Sirius] [tune [to]] FM preset ___ Help FM ___ HD ___ [tune [to]] Sirius [channel] ___ [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ HD ___ You can say the channel number (0233) to listen to that Sirius station. [tune [to]] preset ___ CD Voice Commands Tune If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say E142599 any of the commands in the following table. help Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands (If equipped) E142599 If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: To listen to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: Voice Command (disc | CD [player]) play Voice Commands You can then say any of the following commands. Sirius pause When you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, you can press the voice button, and say any of the commands in the following table. play [play] next track Voice Commands [play] previous track tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___ [tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on] [tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on] [tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off [tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks | songs) [on]] [tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___ [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___ 285 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing * * SYNC™ (If Equipped) SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Voice Command (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on] Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information. shuffle off * You need to indicate to the system which track or folder to repeat or shuffle when using these commands. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature. empty or missing contacts. 286 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. 287 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. Text messaging is not working on SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. This may be a possible device malfunction. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a device limitation. Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your feature. phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. 288 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. SYNC™ (If Equipped) USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The device is not connected. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. Make sure that all song details are populated. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Review the phone voice commands and the media You may be using the wrong voice commands at the voice commands. beginning of their respective sections. SYNC does not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. Review the media voice SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong commands at the beginning the name of a song or artist. voice commands. of the media section. 289 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to The system may not be say "L-O-L-A". reading the name the same way you are saying it. Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section. You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are voice commands. listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe or is calling the wrong Wilson". contact when I want to Using the SYNC phone make a call. menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble name differently than the understanding. SYNC will way you saved it. read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. 290 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as may be very short and similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them. special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone paired and connected to New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC. SYNC in order to find find any applications. AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. Ensure you have downloaded and installed the AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app My phone is connected, but not installed and running on from your phone's app store. I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or 291 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.' over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. Don't forget to restart the example. app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth bug on some order versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off Bluetooth. 292 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone phone is back in to the phone. After a connected, my app is The USB connection to few seconds, the app should running, I restarted the app SYNC may need to be reset. appear in SYNC's Mobile but I still cannot find it on Apps Menu. If not, "Force SYNC. Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of phone listed in SYNC's availble Bluetooth ports, you Mobile Apps Menu. will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system. 293 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Extended Service Plan (ESP) PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only) More than 32 million Ford owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford Extended Service Plan. It is the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Rental Car Reimbursement 1st day Rental Benefit You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs. Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Extended Rental Benefits Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components Roadside Assistance If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including bumper to bumper warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: There are four core Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • 1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. • • • Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford ESP, thereby improving resale value. Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. It is the extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company. 294 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and emergency transportation. Extended Service Plan (ESP) SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY) Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle! You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as: Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections, preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic attention for normal wear: • • • • • • • • • • • Windshield wiper blades. Spark plugs. The clutch disc. Brake pads and linings. Shock absorbers. Struts. Engine Belts. Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment. • • There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles! To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you. Ford ESP P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 295 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers). 296 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 miles (800 kilometers) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 180). Additives and Chemicals If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. 297 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Check every month Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Check every six months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. 298 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point inspection Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation * Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Steering and linkage Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure * ** For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer ** If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™ Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. 299 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Interval Vehicle use and example Normal Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 7500-10000 miles (12000-16000 km) Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 5000-7499 miles (8000-11999 km) Extreme 3000-4999 miles (4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Normal Maintenance Intervals At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Change engine oil and filter. * ** Rotate the tires. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints. 300 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display * Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. * Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals. ** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). Other maintenance items 1 Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter. km) Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter. km) At 100000 miles (160000 km) Every 100000 miles (160000 km) Every 150000 miles (240000 km) Change engine coolant. 2 Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3 Change automatic transmission fluid. Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4 1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers). 3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced. 4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers). 301 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the message appearing in your information display prompting you to change your oil. • Example 1: The message comes on at 28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform the 30000-mile (48000-kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement. • Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers]). Perform the engine air filter replacement. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect U-joints. See axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. * Replace engine air filter. 302 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) * This is an optional feature. Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads) Inspect frequently, service as required * Replace cabin air filter. Replace engine air filter. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) or six months ** Change engine oil and filter. Perform multi-point inspection. Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) * This is an optional feature. ** Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only) Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. 303 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Police vehicles equipped with an engine idle hour meter Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Every 5000 miles (8000 km) Inspect the brake system * Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints (if equipped with grease fittings). Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. ** Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter. km) or six months or as indicated by time/milage Perform multi-point inspection. calculation (see description below) Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid. km) Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs. km) * This is an optional feature. ** Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 180). Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle and cannot be reset to zero. Police vehicles often experience long periods of idling, during which engine oil continues to break down but distance is not accumulated on the odometer. Engine Idle Hour Meter (If Equipped) Your vehicle may been fitted with an idle meter to indicate how much time the vehicle has been sitting in park (P) or neutral (N). The meter is incorporated with the vehicle odometer. Depressing the odometer-reset button once displays the trip odometer (miles [kilometers] following by a "T" for trip odometer); depressing the odometer-reset button a second time displays the idle meter (hours following by an "H" for hours). The idle meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in park (P) or neutral (N). Exceptions There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule: Axle maintenance: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) in your vehicle does not require any normal scheduled maintenance. The system is electronically monitored and notifies the driver of required service by displaying a message in the information display. The PTU lube will be more likely to require a fluid change if the vehicle has 304 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance experienced extended periods of extreme/severe duty cycle driving. Do not check or change the PTU lubricant unless the unit has been submerged in water, shows signs of leakage or a message indicating required service is displayed. Contact your authorized dealer for service and to reset the PTU lube life monitor. Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers). California fuel filter replacement: If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers). Engine air filter and cabin air filter replacement: The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 305 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 306 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 307 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 308 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 309 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 310 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 311 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 312 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 313 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 314 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 315 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices • END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SYNC End User License Agreement (EULA) • • You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") that includes software licensed by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation ("MS") . Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. • IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • 316 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as "SOFTWARE". You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. Appendices • Description of Other Rights and Limitations • • • • Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. • • 317 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. Appendices • • • supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components"). Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE. Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s). FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. 318 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices • • Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information, see: 319 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices • Website http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/ Adobe TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their affiliates or suppliers. Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. End User Notice Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction, reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00). Read and follow instructions: Before using your Windows Automotive- based system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("User's Guide"). Not following precautions found in this User's Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences. 320 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. Appendices Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the User's Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully. Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel. Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. General Operation Voice Command Control: Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel. Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. 321 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. conditions, all of whom shall also be bound by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your account information, as well as other payment and personal information provided by you to Telenav (directly or through the use of the Telenav Software, is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy located at http://www.telenav.com. Telenav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. 1. Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the Telenav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the Telenav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the Telenav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the Telenav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the Telenav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the Telenav Software. Your use of the Telenav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the Telenav Software. These terms and conditions represent the agreement (“Agreement”) between you and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect to the Telenav Software (including upgrades, modifications, or additions thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”). All references herein to “you” and “your” means you, your employees, agents, and contractors, and any other entity on whose behalf you accept these terms and 322 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the Telenav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) use the Telenav Software in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the Telenav Software without advanced written permission of Telenav. 2. Account Information You agree: (a) when registering the Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform Telenav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. 3. Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the Telenav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the Telenav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the Telenav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. 4. Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will Telenav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the Telenav Software. Telenav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the Telenav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the Telenav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the Telenav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the Telenav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. 3.1 License Limitations You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the Telenav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the Telenav Software without the prior express written consent of Telenav; (c) remove from the Telenav Software, or alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or 323 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. 5. Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both Telenav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR 7. Assignment You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the Telenav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the 324 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to Telenav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the Telenav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. Notices by posting them on Telenav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the Telenav Software. 8.4 Telenav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 8.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Telenav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains all right, title and interest in and to the Telenav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and Telenav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and “including,” and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation.” 8.3 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions By using the Telenav Software, you consent to receive from Telenav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”) electronically. Telenav may provide such The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this 325 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors: 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. © 20xx. All rights reserved. Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. Restrictions. ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 326 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Disclaimer of Liability: positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Disclaimer of Warranty: Export Control. TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty. 327 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. Governing Law. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. I. US/Canada Territory A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices: “HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.” Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: “©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.” 328 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.” B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. 3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan: b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data. The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, 329 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data. II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” III. Latin America Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Notice Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011” “source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®” Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico 4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail. “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” IV. Middle East Territory 330 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Territory Appendices A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country Notice Jordan “© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan Data. V. Europe Territory A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe 1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights. 2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Transports.” B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE’s database for the country of Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services. B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic 331 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden. Austria Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement. D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country(ies) Notice 332 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen” “© EuroGeographics” France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD TOPO ®” Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen” Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010” Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.” Hungary “Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.” Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.” Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority” Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal” Appendices Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG” Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.” Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: “Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.” Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie. E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries. VII. China Territory Personal Use Only You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. VI. Australia Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Restrictions Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) 333 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices No Other Warranty: with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions. EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limited Warranty NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues. Limited Liability: TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. rigCustomer Remedies NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. 334 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Export Control Gracenote® Copyright You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents #5,987,525, #6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459, #6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. IP Protection The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. 335 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. © Gracenote 2007. 336 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Appendices Vehicle with SYNC only United States and Mexico FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1 Mexico Model: KMHSG1P1 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Vehicle with SYNC with Touchscreen/My Touch FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 337 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing 338 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index A Automatic Transmission............................110 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow...................................................................110 Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission.............................110 A/C See: Climate Control..........................................86 About This Manual...........................................5 ABS Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Ecoboost™........................................185 See: Brakes............................................................119 Adding Transmission Fluid.............................186 Checking the Transmission Fluid Level...................................................................185 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.................................................................119 Auxiliary Power Points.................................95 Accessories 12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................95 Locations.................................................................95 See: Replacement Parts Recommendation..............................................9 AWD Adjusting the Headlamps.........................190 See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................112 Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................190 Adjusting the Pedals.....................................55 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53 Airbag Disposal...............................................45 Air Conditioning B Blind Spot Information System................131 Using the System.................................................131 See: Climate Control..........................................86 Bonnet Lock Alarm See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................52 See: Opening and Closing the Hood............177 All-Wheel Drive...............................................112 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................52 Booster Seats..................................................20 Types of Booster Seats.......................................21 Brake Fluid Check........................................186 Brakes................................................................119 Alarm System........................................................52 Arming the Alarm.................................................52 Disarming the Alarm...........................................52 Triggering the Alarm............................................52 General Information...........................................119 Breaking-In......................................................153 Bulb Specification Chart...........................195 Appendices.....................................................316 Audible Warnings and Indicators...............71 C Automatic Transmission Warning Chime...................................................................72 Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................71 Key in Ignition Warning Chime..........................71 Parking Brake On Warning Chime...................71 Cabin Air Filter.................................................89 California Proposition 65...............................9 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................238 Audio Control...................................................53 Seek and Media....................................................53 Specifications.....................................................239 Audio System................................................247 General Information..........................................247 Capacities and Specifications 3.7L.................................................................242 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC.............................................................248 Autolamps........................................................59 Capacities and Specifications................233 Car Wash Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........................................................60 Center Console...............................................96 Specifications.....................................................243 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................198 Center Console.....................................................96 Console Mounting Plates..................................96 Universal Top Tray...............................................96 339 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index Changing a Bulb............................................192 Cross Traffic Alert.........................................133 Front Direction Indicator..................................192 Front Fog Lamp...................................................193 Headlamp..............................................................192 Headlamp High Beam......................................193 LED Lamps............................................................194 License Plate Lamp...........................................195 Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp..................................................................194 False Alerts............................................................135 Switching the System Off and On................135 System Errors.......................................................135 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts..................................................................135 System Limitations............................................135 System Sensors...................................................135 Using the System................................................133 Changing a Fuse............................................175 Cruise Control..................................................54 Fuses........................................................................175 Principle of Operation.......................................129 Changing a Road Wheel............................227 Cruise control Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information......................................................227 Tire Change Procedure....................................228 See: Using Cruise Control................................129 Customer Assistance...................................161 D Changing the 12V Battery..........................187 Changing the Engine Air Filter..................197 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................189 Data Recording..................................................7 Front Wiper Blades............................................189 Rear Wiper Blade...............................................189 Event Data Recording............................................7 Service Data Recording.........................................7 Checking the Wiper Blades......................189 Child Restraint and Safety Belt Maintenance.................................................32 Child Safety.......................................................13 Daytime Running Lamps............................60 Digital Radio..................................................250 General Information.............................................13 Direction Indicators........................................61 Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting.............................................251 Child Safety Locks..........................................24 Left-Hand Side......................................................25 Right-Hand Side...................................................25 Children and Airbags...........................................35 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment........................................................35 Child Seat Positioning...................................22 Cleaning Leather Seats..............................201 Cleaning Products.......................................198 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................202 Cleaning the Engine....................................199 Cleaning the Exterior...................................198 Driving Aids......................................................131 Driving Hints....................................................153 Driving Through Water................................154 DRL See: Daytime Running Lamps........................60 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................198 Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................199 Stripes or Graphics............................................199 Underbody............................................................199 E Economical Driving......................................153 Emission Control System..........................107 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.........................201 Cleaning the Interior..................................200 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades...........................................................200 Climate Control..............................................86 Coolant Check On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................108 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing...................................................108 End User License Agreement..................316 SYNC End User License Agreement (EULA)...............................................................316 See: Engine Coolant Check.............................181 Engine Block Heater.....................................99 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40 Using the Engine Block Heater.......................99 Airbags and Police Equipment........................41 340 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index Ford Credit...........................................................9 Engine Coolant Check.................................181 Adding Engine Coolant.....................................182 Checking the Engine Coolant..........................181 Recycled Engine Coolant.................................182 Severe Climates..................................................183 What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................................183 (U.S. Only).................................................................9 Front Passenger Sensing System............36 Fuel and Refueling........................................101 Fuel Consumption.......................................106 Calculating Fuel Economy..............................106 Filling the Tank....................................................106 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................103 Fuel Filter.........................................................187 Fuel Quality - E85........................................102 Engine Oil Check..........................................180 Adding Engine Oil...............................................180 Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................180 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................233 Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles.............................................................102 Fuel Quality....................................................102 Drivebelt Routing...............................................233 Engine Specifications - 3.7L.....................233 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................102 Drivebelt Routing...............................................234 Fuel Shutoff....................................................157 Fuses..................................................................167 Fuse Specification Chart............................167 Environment......................................................12 Essential Towing Checks...........................148 Before Towing a Trailer.....................................149 Hitches...................................................................148 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC).........................................150 Safety Chains.......................................................149 Trailer Brakes........................................................149 Trailer Lamps.......................................................149 When Towing a Trailer......................................149 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........172 Power Distribution Box.....................................167 G Gauges................................................................67 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............68 Fuel Gauge.............................................................68 Information Display.............................................67 Speedometer........................................................68 Event Data Recording See: Data Recording...............................................7 Export Unique Options...................................11 Extended Service Plan (ESP).................294 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................46 General Maintenance Information.......296 SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............295 SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).........................294 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................298 Owner Checks and Services..........................297 Protecting Your Investment..........................296 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................296 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?.....................................................296 Exterior Mirrors................................................64 Blind Spot Information System......................65 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................64 Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................64 Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................64 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................64 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada..........................................................164 Getting the Services You Need.................161 F Away From Home................................................161 Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27 H Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29 Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........27 Handbrake Floor Mats.......................................................154 Foot Pedals See: Parking Brake.............................................120 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................157 See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................55 341 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index Head Restraints..............................................90 Information Messages..................................76 Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................91 Tilting Head Restraints ......................................91 AdvanceTrac™.......................................................77 Alarm.........................................................................77 AWD...........................................................................77 Battery and Charging System..........................78 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System......................................................78 Brake System.........................................................79 Doors and Locks...................................................79 Electronic Stability Control...............................79 Engine......................................................................80 Fuel...........................................................................80 Keys and Intelligent Access.............................80 Lane Keeping System..........................................81 Maintenance...........................................................81 Park Aid....................................................................82 Park Brake...............................................................82 Power Steering......................................................83 Seats.........................................................................83 Starting System....................................................83 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................84 Traction Control....................................................84 Transmission.........................................................84 Heated Windows and Mirrors...................88 Heated Exterior Mirror........................................88 Heated Rear Window.........................................88 Heating See: Climate Control..........................................86 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate............................................................87 Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................87 General Hints.........................................................87 Heating the Interior Quickly..............................87 Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions.................................88 Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........88 Recommended Settings for Heating............87 Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather..............................................................88 Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient Temperatures...................................................88 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.............................................................119 Hood Lock Installing Child Seats.....................................14 Child Seats...............................................................14 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................15 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH).............................................17 Using Tether Straps..............................................19 See: Opening and Closing the Hood............177 I Instrument Cluster.........................................67 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................60 Interior Lamps..................................................61 Ignition Switch.................................................97 In California (U.S. Only).............................162 Information Display Control.......................54 Dome Lamp............................................................61 Dome Task Lamp..................................................61 Front Map Lamps..................................................61 Rear Interior Lamp...............................................62 Information Display Control Features..........54 Information Displays.....................................73 General Information............................................73 Interior Mirror...................................................65 Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................65 Introduction........................................................5 J Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................158 Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................158 Jump Starting.......................................................159 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................158 Removing the Jumper Cables........................159 342 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index K Manual Seats...................................................92 Lumbar Adjustment............................................93 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward...............................................................92 Recline Adjustment.............................................92 Keys and Remote Controls........................46 Principle of Operation........................................46 L Message Center Lighting Control..............................................58 Mirrors See: Information Displays.................................73 See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................88 See: Windows and Mirrors................................63 Headlamp Flasher...............................................59 High Beams............................................................58 Spot Lamp Control..............................................59 Mobile Communications Equipment........11 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................234 Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...............................235 Lighting..............................................................58 General Information............................................58 Load Carriers See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............137 N Load Carrying..................................................137 Load Limit.......................................................138 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........299 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles.............................................................145 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................138 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................299 Normal Maintenance Intervals....................300 O Locking and Unlocking................................48 Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................180 Oil Check Battery Saver.........................................................50 Hidden Rear Door Locks....................................48 Illuminated Entry..................................................50 Illuminated Exit.....................................................50 Independent Liftgate Locking Feature........49 Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade...........................................................49 Opening a Rear Door From the Inside..........50 Power Door Locks................................................48 Remote Control....................................................48 See: Engine Oil Check.......................................180 Opening and Closing the Hood................177 Closing the Hood................................................178 Opening the Hood...............................................177 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature......................................................165 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........165 Overhead Console.........................................96 Locks...................................................................48 Lug Nuts P See: Changing a Road Wheel........................227 Parking Aids....................................................124 M Principle of Operation.......................................124 Manual Climate Control..............................86 Manual Liftgate..............................................50 Parking Brake.................................................120 Passenger Knee Airbag................................39 Pedals.................................................................55 Perchlorate..........................................................9 Personal Safety System™..........................33 Closing the Liftgate..............................................51 Opening the Liftgate............................................51 How Does the Personal Safety System Work?...................................................................33 Maintenance...................................................176 General Information...........................................176 Post-Crash Alert System...........................160 Power Door Locks See: Locking and Unlocking.............................48 343 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index Power Seats.....................................................93 Power Steering Fluid Check......................187 Power Windows..............................................63 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)...............................................................165 Roadside Assistance...................................156 Accessory Delay....................................................63 Bounce-Back.........................................................63 One-Touch Down.................................................63 One-Touch Up.......................................................63 Window Lock.........................................................63 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance........................................................156 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance........................................................156 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance....................................156 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance....................................156 Protecting the Environment........................12 R Roadside Emergencies...............................156 Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................137 Rear Loadspace Hatches...........................137 Rear Parking Aid............................................124 Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................138 Thumbwheel Kit..................................................137 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................125 Rear Seats.........................................................93 Running-In Fold-flat Seatback...............................................93 See: Breaking-In..................................................153 Rear Under Floor Storage..........................137 Running Out of Fuel....................................103 Load Floor..............................................................137 Load Safe Label...................................................137 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container..........................................................103 Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................103 Rear View Camera........................................125 Using the Rear View Camera System.........126 S Rear View Camera See: Rear View Camera....................................125 Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29 Safety Belt Minder.........................................30 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........56 Rear Camera Washer..........................................57 Rear Window Washer.........................................57 Rear Window Wiper............................................56 Belt-Minder™........................................................30 Safety Belts......................................................26 Recommended Towing Weights.............147 Refueling.........................................................104 Principle of Operation........................................26 Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime..............................................................30 Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................105 Remote Control..............................................46 Conditions of operation.....................................30 Car Finder................................................................47 Changing the Remote Control Battery.........47 Sounding the Panic Alarm................................47 Safety Canopy™............................................39 Safety Precautions.......................................101 Satellite Radio..............................................253 Removing a Headlamp...............................192 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............202 Replacement Parts Recommendation.........................................9 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)................................................................254 Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............253 SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................253 Troubleshooting.................................................254 Collision Repairs......................................................9 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs...................................................................9 Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........305 Scheduled Maintenance..........................296 Seats..................................................................90 Security..............................................................52 Side Airbags.....................................................38 Sitting in the Correct Position...................90 Snow Chains Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control.............................................................47 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................166 See: Using Snow Chains..................................222 344 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index T Special Notices................................................10 My Fleet Management (if equipped)..............11 New Vehicle Limited Warranty........................10 Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles........................................10 On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)......................10 Special Instructions.............................................10 Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............10 Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow...........10 Tailgate See: Manual Liftgate..........................................50 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............233 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)........................163 Tire Care..........................................................207 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................302 Glossary of Tire Terminology........................209 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................207 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall............................................................210 Police Wheels and Tires...................................221 Temperature A B C...........................................208 Traction AA A B C..............................................208 Treadwear............................................................208 Engine Idle Hour Meter....................................304 Exceptions...........................................................304 Speed Control See: Cruise Control............................................129 Stability Control............................................122 Principle of Operation.......................................122 Starter Switch See: Ignition Switch.............................................97 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........223 Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................97 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System.......................................224 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System ......................................224 Failure to Start......................................................98 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................98 Important Ventilating Information................99 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving.................................................................98 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................................................98 Tires See: Wheels and Tires.....................................205 Towing a Trailer.............................................146 Load Placement.................................................146 Starting and Stopping the Engine............97 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Ecoboost™/3.7L...............................151 General Information............................................97 Steering............................................................136 Emergency Towing..............................................151 Recreational Towing...........................................151 Electric Power Steering....................................136 Steering Wheel................................................53 Storage Compartments..............................96 Sun Visors.........................................................66 Towing..............................................................146 Traction Control..............................................121 Slide-on-rod..........................................................66 Transmission Code Designation.............237 Transmission...................................................110 Transmission Principle of Operation........................................121 Supplementary Restraints System.........34 Principle of Operation........................................34 Symbols Glossary.............................................5 SYNC™ Applications and Services.......272 See: Transmission...............................................110 Transporting the Vehicle...........................150 911 Assist................................................................272 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................274 U SYNC™...........................................................256 General Information.........................................256 Under Hood Overview.................................179 USB Port.........................................................255 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................286 345 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index Using All-Wheel Drive..................................112 Using Voice Recognition...........................258 Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel Drive (AWD)................................114 How Utility Vehicles Differ from Other Vehicles..............................................................114 Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched Tires.....................................................................114 Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare Tires......................................................................113 Initiating a Voice Session................................258 System Interaction and Feedback..............259 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only).........................163 V Vehicle Care...................................................198 Using Cruise Control....................................129 General Information..........................................198 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................130 Switching Cruise Control On..........................129 Vehicle Certification Label........................237 Vehicle Identification Number................236 Vehicle Storage............................................202 Using Snow Chains.....................................222 Using Stability Control................................123 Battery...................................................................203 Body........................................................................203 Brakes....................................................................203 Cooling system...................................................203 Engine....................................................................203 Fuel system..........................................................203 General..................................................................203 Miscellaneous.....................................................204 Removing Vehicle From Storage.................204 Tires........................................................................203 AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC®)..............................................................123 Using Summer Tires....................................221 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player.............................................................277 Accessing Your USB Song Library................281 Bluetooth Devices and System Settings............................................................283 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port............................................................277 Media Menu Features.......................................281 Media Voice Commands.................................278 USB 2......................................................................283 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........284 Ventilation See: Climate Control..........................................86 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number............236 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........260 Accessing Features through the Phone Menu..................................................................265 Accessing Your Phone Settings...................268 Bluetooth Devices.............................................269 Making Calls........................................................263 Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............260 Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................261 Phone Options during an Active Call.........264 Phone Voice Commands................................262 Receiving Calls....................................................263 System Settings.................................................270 Text Messaging..................................................266 Using Traction Control.................................121 Switching the System Off.................................121 System Indicator Lights and Messages...........................................................121 Using a Switch......................................................121 Using the Information Display Controls..............................................................121 346 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing Index W Warning Lamps and Indicators................68 Anti-Lock Braking System................................69 Battery.....................................................................69 Blind Spot Monitor..............................................69 Brake System........................................................69 Cruise Control........................................................69 Direction Indicator...............................................69 Door Ajar.................................................................69 Engine Coolant Temperature..........................69 Engine Oil................................................................70 Fasten Safety Belt................................................70 Front Airbag............................................................70 High Beam..............................................................70 Hood Ajar................................................................70 Liftgate Ajar............................................................70 Liftgate Lock Release..........................................70 Low Fuel Level.......................................................70 Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................70 Low Washer Fluid.................................................70 Parking Lamps.......................................................70 Powertrain Fault...................................................70 Service Engine Soon.............................................71 Stability Control.....................................................71 Stability Control Off..............................................71 Washer Fluid Check.....................................187 Washers See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................198 See: Wipers and Washers.................................56 Waxing..............................................................199 Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel........................227 Wheels and Tires.........................................205 General Information.........................................205 Technical Specifications..................................231 Windows and Mirrors....................................63 Windshield Washers.....................................56 Windshield Wipers........................................56 Speed Dependent Wipers................................56 Wipers and Washers.....................................56 Wrecker Towing See: Transporting the Vehicle........................150 347 Explorer (TUB), enUSA, Edition date: 03/2015, First Printing
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : Unknown Create Date : 2015:03:27 13:48:12Z Modify Date : 2015:04:10 08:38:13-04:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Format : application/pdf Title : Untitled Creator : Unknown Producer : XEP 4.16 build 20090723 Trapped : False Creator Tool : Unknown Metadata Date : 2015:04:10 08:38:13-04:00 Document ID : uuid:61f3b4f4-ec89-4a05-8f40-dc6ed50296d4 Instance ID : uuid:d5d4eaac-9a1c-4720-a5dd-d55caa7d20f7 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 350EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools